JP2020031867A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase the usability of a storage unit.SOLUTION: In a game machine provided with a storage unit (lower tray 23) capable of storing game balls, the storage unit includes a through hole (ball discharge port 232) for discharging the stored game balls and an opening/closing member (opening/closing door 233) for opening and closing the through hole, on the bottom section of the storage unit. A distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface of the storage unit and the lower surface of the opening/closing member is longer than a distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom section of the storage unit and the upper surface of the opening/closing member.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a storage unit capable of storing game balls.

  A storage portion capable of storing game balls is provided, and the storage portion is formed to penetrate vertically on the bottom surface of the storage portion, and has a ball hole for discharging the game balls stored in the storage portion to the outside. Gaming machines are known. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2014-33681

However, the storage unit provided in a conventional gaming machine has not always been convenient for a player.
An object of the present invention is to improve the usability of the storage unit.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine having a storage unit capable of storing gaming balls,
The storage section, on the bottom portion of the storage section,
A through hole for discharging the stored game balls,
An opening and closing member for opening and closing the through hole,
A distance between a lower surface of the bottom portion and a lower surface of the opening / closing member is longer than a distance between an upper surface of the bottom portion and an upper surface of the opening / closing member.

  According to the present invention, the usability of the storage unit can be improved.

It is a front view of the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. 1 is an exploded perspective view and a side view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining a lower plate unit. It is a figure explaining a lower plate unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame unit. It is a figure explaining a speaker decoration. It is a figure explaining a hit ball launching device and a foul ball catch unit. It is a figure explaining a hit ball launching device. It is a figure explaining a foul ball catching unit. It is a figure explaining a foul ball catching unit. It is a figure explaining a foul ball catching unit. It is a figure explaining an upper plate unit. It is a figure explaining an effect button. It is a figure explaining a unit main part. It is a figure explaining a water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining a water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining a water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining a water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining a viewing window part. It is a figure explaining a viewing window part. It is a figure explaining a front frame light emitting unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame light emitting unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame light emitting unit. It is a figure explaining a spherical channel unit. It is a figure explaining a spherical channel unit. It is a figure explaining a spherical channel unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining composition of a special result. It is a figure explaining an operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure for explaining transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure explaining a display in a performance display. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetch big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process and a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 changing process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 1 and the big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command analysis process. It is a figure explaining an example of a pre-reading effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reach effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reach effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reach effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reach effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reach effect.

<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 30) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Above the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name and the like of the gaming machine 10 is provided.
In addition, lamps and LEDs are built in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce effects, and notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps or LEDs are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the contents of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

  An upper plate (reservoir plate) 21 for supplying game balls to the hitting ball firing device 240 (see FIG. 10) is provided at a lower portion of the glass frame 15, and a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 pays out. The upper ball exit 22 from which the game balls flow out is provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 32) for receiving a pressing operation input from a player. The effect button 25 also has a built-in drive source (a vibration motor 251a (see FIG. 16) which is a type of frame effect device) for vibrating the effect button 25. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function of performing a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25. The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a protruding state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is higher than in the normal state). May be.

  At the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hit ball firing device 240, and the like. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

On the right side of the effect button 25, a lending button (ball lending button) 27a operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, for discharging a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. Button 27b, a balance indicator (balance display section) 27c for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper plate operating lever operated to cause the game balls in the upper plate 21 to flow down to the lower plate 23. 27d, a portable terminal holder 28 for placing a portable terminal such as a smartphone owned by the player, and the like are provided. Further, on the left side of the effect button 25, a volume control button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hit ball launching device 240 moves the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 30), an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is interposed is performed. It can be performed.

FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 3B is a left side view of the gaming machine 10.
For example, as shown in FIG. 3A, the front frame 12 includes an inner frame unit 12a and a lower plate unit 12b mounted on a lower portion on the front side of the inner frame unit 12a. Further, the glass frame 15 includes a front frame unit 15a and a top unit 15b mounted on an upper portion on the front side of the front frame unit 15a.

  Among the portions surrounding the game board 30 of the front frame unit 15a, the lower portion 15a1 (including the inside of the upper plate 21), the left portion 15a2, and the right portion 15a3 are formed of black members. During the game, the player pays attention to the game board 30 (especially the display device 41 and the winning opening). At this time, since a portion surrounding the game board 30 is also in view, a low brightness color is selected as the color of the portion. By doing so, the sense of oppression given to the player by the game board 30 (including the portion surrounding the game board 30) can be reduced.

  Furthermore, by selecting a low-brightness color as the color of the portion surrounding the game board 30, the light-emitting device (for example, the board decoration device 46) provided on the game board 30 and the glass frame 15 are provided by the low brightness portion. Since the light emitting device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) can be separated from the light emitting device, the light emission of the light emitting device provided on the glass frame 15 can be made to stand out. In addition, when the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible to the protruding state, the effect button 25 overlaps the lower portion 15a1 in the front-rear direction when the effect button 25 is in the protruding state. That is, when the effect button 25 is in the protruding state, the appearance of the low-brightness portion changes. The colors of the portions surrounding the game board 30 (the lower portion 15a1, the left portion 15a2, and the right portion 15a3) are not limited to black as long as they have low brightness.

On the front surface of the top unit 15b, a display unit 16 such as a model name is provided. The model name display section 16 is configured by sandwiching a sheet on which the model name is displayed between a clear cover for protecting the front surface (display surface) of the sheet and a base member, and exchanging only the sheet. Can change the model name. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the entire top unit 15b for each model, so that costs can be reduced.
Note that the top unit 15b can perform a predetermined operation such as a front-back movement operation and a vertical movement operation from the viewpoint of, for example, reducing the feeling of pressure exerted on the player by the top unit 15b and enhancing the effect of the top unit 15b. It may be configured as follows.

For example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the front side of the top unit 15b is inclined such that the upper end is located on the front side rather than the lower end. That is, the top unit 15b faces the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10. Thus, the top unit 15b can be made to look large, and the effect of the top unit 15b can be enhanced.
The upper part of the gaming machine 10 has substantially the same degree of forward projection as the lower part of the gaming machine 10. For example, as shown in FIG. The degree is slightly larger than the degree of protrusion of the lower part. It should be noted that the degree of protrusion of the upper part may be configured to be smaller than the degree of protrusion of the lower part. With such a structure, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player hitting the head against the top unit 15b. Become.

<Lower plate unit>
FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the lower plate unit 12b as viewed from the front right side, and FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the lower plate unit 12b as viewed from the front left side. 5A is a plan view of the lower plate unit 12b, FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 5A, and FIG. 5C is a sectional view of FIG. () Is an enlarged view of a main part.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4A, a call button 27f operated by a player to call a clerk of a game store is provided on the left side of the lower plate 23. When the call button 27f is operated, a signal is transmitted to the data lamp in the amusement store as external information, and the data lamp is illuminated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the downstream portion 231 of the flow path in which the game balls flow from the payout unit to the lower plate 23 and the flow channel in which the game balls flow from the upper plate 21 to the lower plate 23 are provided. The upper surface is covered with a cover member 231a. The downstream portion 231 also serves as a storage space for storing game balls when the lower plate 23 is full.
The cover member 231a is a transparent member, and when the surface is damaged, it changes whitish. When a wrongdoing using a foul ball (a second wrongdoing described later) is performed, the thread member rubs against the cover member 231a, and the surface of the cover member 231a is scratched. It is possible to confirm whether or not wrongdoing has been performed. Further, since the cover member 231a is provided detachably on the lower plate unit 12b, only the cover member 213a can be replaced. Therefore, it is difficult to find a new flaw (new misconduct) when the cover member 231a is damaged, but when the cover member 231a is damaged, the cover member 231a is replaced. By doing so, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not a new wrongdoing has been performed.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 4B and 5A, the lower plate 23 has a ball outlet 232 vertically penetrating the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening / closing door for opening and closing the ball outlet 232. 233 and a lower tray ball removing lever 234 are provided. By operating the lower plate ball removing lever 234, the opening / closing door 233 is opened, and the game balls in the lower plate 23 can be discharged downward from the ball discharge port 232. The ball discharge port 232 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from above and below, and has a diameter D3 (see FIG. 5C) of about 35 mm (that is, three times or more the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, the game balls in the lower plate 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the lower surface in the lower plate 23 (that is, the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower plate 23) is inclined toward the ball discharge port 232. Therefore, even when the number of the game balls in the lower plate 23 is small, the game balls in the lower plate 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232.
The distance D1 (see FIG. 4B) between the end (outlet) of the downstream portion 231 and the ball discharge port 232 is set to about 9 mm (that is, less than the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, when the number of the game balls in the lower plate 23 is small, the game balls flowing out of the downstream portion 231 move immediately onto the opening / closing door 233 and stay on the opening / closing door 233, so that the game balls in the lower plate 23 are Even if the number is small, the game balls in the lower plate 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the left end of the cover member 231a is located on the left side of the terminal end (exit) of the downstream portion 231. For example, as shown in FIG. The left end portion vertically overlaps a part of the ball discharge port 232. That is, an eave protruding toward the ball discharge port 232 is provided at the end of the downstream portion 231. Thus, the opening of the upper surface of the lower plate 23 is reduced (that is, the intrusion of dust and the like into the lower plate 23 is suppressed) while the capacity of the lower plate 23 is secured.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the rear surface 23a in the lower plate 23 is inclined such that the lower end is located rearward of the upper end. As a result, the capacity of the lower plate 23 is increased without enlarging the upper opening of the lower plate 23.

  In addition, since the rear surface 23a in the lower plate 23 is inclined such that the lower end is located rearward of the upper end, when the player scrapes the game ball from the lower plate 23 by hand, the scraping operation is performed. Cheap. Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, for example, a step portion 235 which is one step deeper is provided on the rear surface 23a. Therefore, when the game ball is scraped out by hand, the step portion 235 becomes a space for bending the finger, so that the scraping-out operation becomes easier.

For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, the distance D21 between the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower plate 23 and the lower surface of the bottom portion is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is set to 1.5 times or more and less than twice the diameter of the game ball. In FIG. 5C, the game ball is indicated by a two-dot chain line.
The distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower plate 23 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 233 is less than the diameter of the game ball, specifically, for example, about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Is set. Therefore, the opening / closing door 233 is one step lower than the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower plate 23, so that the game ball can easily stay on the opening / closing door 233. Further, the step (distance D22) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball on the opening / closing door 233 can be easily scraped out.

  Since the step (distance D22) is set to about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, the game ball (specifically, the peripheral surface of the ball discharge port 232 and the door 233) is sandwiched between the door 233. When the game ball sandwiched between the side of the game ball) returns upward, it easily returns to the inside of the lower plate 23. That is, if the step (distance D22) is too small, the game ball sandwiched between the doors 233 may be pushed out by the closing force of the door 233 and may jump out of the lower plate 23. In the case of the present embodiment, Since the step (distance D22) is set to about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, even if it is pushed out with the closing force of the opening / closing door 233, it is less likely that it will jump out of the lower plate 23, It is easy to return into the lower plate 23.

  The distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom portion of the lower plate 23 and the lower surface of the door 233 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, for example, about 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Is set. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 233 is opened and the game ball in the lower plate 23 is discharged from the ball discharge port 232, the game ball is guided downward (directed toward the lower ball box) by the ball discharge port 232. Can be. Further, when the game ball sandwiched between the doors 233 falls down, it is difficult for the ball to be splattered even if it is pushed out vigorously by the closing force of the door 233 (the scattering direction is restricted by the ball outlet 232). Inconvenience of falling down hardly occurs.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine including the storage portion (the lower plate 23) capable of storing the game balls, the storage portion is provided on the bottom surface portion of the storage portion. , And an opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) for opening and closing the through hole, and a distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface and the lower surface of the opening / closing member is equal to the distance of the bottom surface. It is longer than the distance D22 between the upper surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (see FIG. 5C).
Therefore, the usability of the storage part (lower plate 23) can be improved. Specifically, since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member is shorter than the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member, the game ball in the storage portion is manually taken out. At this time, a game ball fitted on a step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom portion of the storage portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233), that is, a game ball on the opening / closing member, can be easily scraped out, and usability is improved. good. In addition, when the number of the game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls in the storage unit are accumulated on the opening / closing member. Therefore, even when the game balls in the storage unit are small, the game balls in the storage unit are inserted into the through holes (ball discharge ports 232). Can be discharged smoothly from Further, since the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member is longer than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member, the game ball in the storage portion is discharged from the through hole. In addition, the through-hole allows the game ball to be guided downward, which is convenient.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (the opening / closing door 233) is less than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower surface of the bottom portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member. Can be configured to be greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball.
With this configuration, the usability of the storage unit (the lower plate 23) can be further improved. Specifically, since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (the opening / closing door 233) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, when removing the game ball in the storage portion by hand, The step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) does not hinder the operation of scraping the game balls, and is convenient. Further, since the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball in the storage portion is discharged from the through hole (ball discharge port 232), the through hole is used. This allows the game ball to be guided downward with high precision, and is easy to use.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine provided with a storage portion (lower plate 23) capable of storing game balls, the storage portion stores the stored game balls on the bottom portion of the storage portion. A through hole (ball discharge port 232) for discharging and an opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) for opening and closing the through hole are provided. It is larger than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the member (see FIG. 5C).
Therefore, the usability of the storage part (lower plate 23) can be improved. Specifically, since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member is smaller than the width of the through hole (the diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232), when the game ball in the storage portion is manually taken out, A game ball fitted to a step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom portion of the storage portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233), that is, the game ball on the opening / closing member can be easily scraped out, and the usability is good. In addition, when the number of the game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls in the storage unit are accumulated on the opening / closing member. Therefore, even when the game balls in the storage unit are small, the game balls in the storage unit are inserted into the through holes (ball discharge ports 232). Can be discharged smoothly from Also, since the width of the through hole (diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232) is larger than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member, the game balls in the storage portion can be smoothly discharged from the through hole. It is easy to use.
In the present embodiment, the ball discharge port 232 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from above and below, but the shape of the ball discharge port 232 can be changed as appropriate, and for example, has a substantially elliptical shape when viewed from above and below. May be. When the ball outlet 232 has a substantially elliptical shape, for example, the short diameter of the ball outlet 232 corresponds to the width of the through hole.

<Front frame unit>
FIG. 6A is an exploded perspective view of the front frame unit 15a, and FIG. 6B is a rear view (rear view) of the front frame unit 15a. FIG. 7 is a side sectional view of the front frame unit 15a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the front frame unit 15a includes a front frame main body 151 and speaker decorations mounted on the upper left and upper right portions on the front side of the front frame main body 151, respectively. 152, an upper plate unit 153 mounted on a lower portion on the front side of the front frame main body 151, a front frame light emitting unit 154 mounted on each of the front left and right portions of the front frame main body 151, A cover member 155 is attached to each of the upper left and upper right portions on the rear side of the front frame body 151.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 6A, upper speakers 19a are mounted on the upper left and upper right portions on the front side of the front frame body 151, respectively. The upper speaker 19a on the left side is mounted so that the upper end is located on the front side of the lower end and the left end is located on the front side of the right end. The upper speaker 19a on the right side is attached in a state where the upper end is located on the front side with respect to the lower end and the right end is located on the front side with respect to the left end. That is, both the left and right upper speakers 19a are attached in a state where sound radiated from the front side thereof is inclined obliquely downward and inward.

  The upper speaker 19a is covered with a speaker decoration 152 from the front. That is, the speaker decoration 152 prevents the sound from the upper speaker 19a from being directly transmitted to the player. Specifically, the sound radiated from the front side of the upper speaker 19a is reflected by the speaker decoration 152 toward the cover glass 14 as shown by a dashed line in FIG. The light is reflected toward the player sitting in front of 10. Therefore, when the sound from the upper speaker 19a is a high-pitched sound, the player may feel uncomfortable when transmitted directly to the player. However, in the case of the present embodiment, the sound is not transmitted directly to the player. It can reduce discomfort and increase interest. Further, the sound (especially low sound) from the upper speaker 19a hits the cover glass 14 and sounds as if the sound is being output from the entire cover glass 14, thereby increasing interest. Further, since the sound from the upper speaker 19a can be restricted from leaking to the outside by the speaker decoration 152, the sound from the upper speaker 19a can be easily heard, thereby increasing interest.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the lower portion on the rear side of the upper speaker 19 a is separated from the cover glass 14. Therefore, the sound radiated from the lower portion on the rear side of the upper speaker 19a is reflected by the cover glass 14 and travels toward the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10 as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. Become. Therefore, not only the sound radiated from the front side of the upper speaker 19a but also a part of the sound radiated from the rear side of the upper speaker 19a can be transmitted to the player, so that the volume can be suppressed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 6B and 7, since the upper speaker 19 a is covered with the cover member 155 from behind, the sound radiated from the rear side of the upper speaker 19 a is confined inside the cover member 155. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound from the upper speaker 19a from leaking to the rear of the gaming machine 10.
Further, by laying the wiring from the upper speaker 19a on the outer surface of the cover member 155, the wiring from the upper speaker 19a can be moved away from the cover glass 14, so that the cover glass 14 can be easily attached and detached. Further, the cover member 155 also has a role of preventing an illegal act of allowing an unauthorized member such as a piano wire to enter the inside of the gaming machine 10 from a gap between the upper speaker 19a and the glass frame 15. In FIG. 6B, illustration of the upper speaker 19a is omitted.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10. 9A is a perspective view of the right speaker decoration 152 viewed from the front right side, and FIG. 9B is a perspective view of the right speaker decoration 152 viewed from the front left side.
For example, as shown in FIG. 8, on the right side of the top unit 15b, a top light emitting unit 15b1, which is a kind of the frame decoration device 18, is provided. Similarly, on the left side of the top unit 15b, a top light-emitting unit 15b1, which is a type of the frame decoration device 18, is provided. When the top light emitting portion 15b1 emits light, it is possible to appeal to a player who is on the side of the gaming machine 10 (such as an island entrance of a game store).

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9A and 9B, the speaker decoration 152 is provided with an irregular reflection portion 152a that irregularly reflects light, and an upper reflection portion 152b and a lower reflection portion 152c that reflect light. Have been.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the irregular reflection portion 152a has a random uneven surface, and emits light rearward from the top light emitting portion 15b1 by irregularly reflecting light on the uneven surface. The reflected light can be reflected toward the front or the upper reflector 152b or the lower reflector 152c.

In addition, the upper reflecting portion 152b has a plurality of first reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the front and a plurality of second reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the rear, The first reflection surface and the second reflection surface reflect light from the top light emitting portion 15b1 (including light incident from the top light emitting portion 15b1 via the irregular reflection portion 152a). The first reflection surface and the second reflection surface are alternately arranged, the first reflection surface is directed forward from the second reflection surface, and the width W1 of the first reflection surface is equal to the width of the second reflection surface. Is substantially the same as
In addition, the lower reflector 152c has a plurality of third reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the front and a plurality of fourth reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the rear. The third reflection surface and the fourth reflection surface reflect light from the top light-emitting portion 15b1 (including light incident from the top light-emitting portion 15b1 via the irregular reflection portion 152a and / or the upper reflection portion 152b). The third reflecting surface and the fourth reflecting surface are alternately arranged, and the third reflecting surface faces forward from the fourth reflecting surface, and the width W2 of the third reflecting surface is equal to the width of the fourth reflecting surface. Is substantially the same as

  Since the lower reflecting section 152c is farther from the top light emitting section 15b1 than the upper reflecting section 152b, the amount of light incident on the lower reflecting section 152c is smaller than the amount of light incident on the upper reflecting section 152b. Therefore, when the width W2 of the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c is the same as the width W1 of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b, the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c is smaller. However, the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflector 152b becomes smaller, and the lower reflector 152c appears darker than the upper reflector 152b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c and the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b are equal to each other on the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c. The width W2 is wider than the width W1 of the first reflection surface of the upper reflection section 152b. As described above, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected by the upper reflector 152b and the lower reflector 152c is adjusted by the width of the reflection surfaces of the upper reflector 152b and the lower reflector 152c.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflector 152c is equal to the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflector 152b. The direction is different from the direction of the first reflection surface of the upper reflection section 152b. Specifically, since the third reflecting surface faces outward from the first reflecting surface, light from outside the gaming machine 10 (for example, light from an adjacent gaming machine) is more third than the first reflecting surface. Many are incident on the reflection surface. That is, the lower reflecting section 152c is configured so that the small amount of incident light from the top light emitting section 15b1 can be compensated for by the amount of external incident light. As described above, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected by the upper reflector 152b and the lower reflector 152c is adjusted according to the directions of the reflection surfaces of the upper reflector 152b and the lower reflector 152c.
Further, the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c is located outside the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b, and faces outside of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b. Thus, the top unit 15b can be made to look large at the time of light emission, so that the effect of the top unit 15b can be enhanced.

<Ball launch device and foul ball catch unit>
FIG. 10 is a front view of the inner frame unit 12a, and is an enlarged view of a lower portion of the inner frame unit 12a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, a hit ball launching device 240 and a foul ball catching unit 210 are mounted on a lower portion on the front side of the inner frame unit 12 a. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a hitting ball firing device 240 arranged below the front frame 12. The game ball hit by the firing punch 241 of the hit ball firing device 240 is guided to the game area 32 by a firing rail 242 formed at a lower portion of the front frame 12 so as to be inclined upward from lower right to upper left. When the launching force is weak, the game ball fired from the hitting ball firing device 240 is fouled as a foul ball (a game ball that has returned without being hit into the game area 32) as shown by a dashed line in FIG. It is collected by the ball catch unit 210 and supplied to the lower plate 23.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10, the hitting ball firing device 240 includes a cutting blade 243 that cuts a thread when a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thread is attached is fired from the hitting ball firing device 240.
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thin thread (thread member) is attached is fired into the game area 32, and the thread member is manipulated from the upper plate 21 to illegally enter a winning port or the like. Fraudulent acts to win a prize may be performed. As a countermeasure against such misconduct using an illegal ball, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a cutting blade 243 for cutting a thread member of the illegal ball.

11A is a front view of the hitting ball firing device 240, FIG. 11B is a front perspective view of the hitting ball firing device 240, and FIG. 11C is a front perspective view of the cutting blade 243. FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 11A, the hit ball launching device 240 is provided with a guide path 244 that guides a game ball supplied from the front (the glass frame 15 side) to a launch position. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a supply path (not shown) for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 to the hitting ball firing device 240. That is, the gaming machine 10 has a supply path (not shown) provided on the glass frame 15 side as a path for guiding the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 to the firing position of the hitting ball firing device 240, and a front frame 12 side. And a guide path 244 provided in the vehicle. When the glass frame 15 is in the closed state, the outlet of the supply path and the inlet 244a of the guide path 244 are connected, and the supply path and the guide path 244 communicate with each other.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, an entrance 244 a of the guide path 244 is provided on a cover member 245 of the hit ball firing device 240. The inlet 244a is formed as an opening that penetrates the cover member 245 in the front-rear direction.
The cover member 245 is provided with a thread guiding portion 246 that can guide the thread member of the illegal ball toward the cutting edge of the cutting blade 243 when the illegal ball is fired. The yarn guiding portion 246 is an opening that penetrates the cover member 245 in the front-rear direction, and is cut out so as to be connected to an upper portion on the left end of the entrance 244a of the guiding path 244. That is, the yarn guiding section 246 and the inlet section 244a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The cutting blade 243 is attached to the cover member 245 such that the cutting edge portion is located in the yarn guiding portion 246.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11C, the cutting blade 243 includes a flat base end 243a and a flat first end connected to the base end 243a and extending in the same plane as the base end 243a. A distal end portion 243b and a flat second distal end portion 243c connected to the proximal end portion 243a and bent backward from the proximal end portion 243a are provided. The first tip 243b and the second tip 243c are vertically arranged side by side, and a gap 243d formed between the tips 243b and 243c (boundary) cuts the thread member of the illegal ball. Becomes
The distal end surface 243b1 (right side) of the first distal end 243b and the distal end surface 243c1 (right side) of the second distal end 243c descend toward the gap 243d so as to guide the thread member of the illegal ball to the gap 243d. It is formed as an inclined surface. The cutting blade 243 is fixed to the cover member 245 in a state where the cutting blade 243 is housed in a housing recess formed on the rear surface side of the cover member 245.

  In the cutting mechanism configured as described above, when an illegal ball is fired by the hit ball firing device 240, the thread member of the illegal ball is guided to the cutting blade 243 by the thread guiding unit 246, and the cutting blade 243. In the gap 243d. Then, the thread member that has cut into the gap 243d is pulled and cut by the firing force of the illegal ball. The thread guiding portion 246 is cut out at an end of the entrance portion 244a so as to be connected to the entrance portion 244a of the guiding path 244. Since the cutting blade 243 is disposed at a position deep in the thread guiding portion 246, the game is performed. The thread member of the illegal ball can be cut without preventing the ball from flowing down.

  The firing rail 242 is configured to guide the game ball fired from the firing position to the upper left. The yarn guiding section 246 is formed so as to be connected to the left end of the entrance 244a of the guiding path 244, and the cutting blade 243 is disposed so that the cutting edge thereof faces right. In this way, by providing the yarn guiding portion 246 on the side of the entrance 244a on the game ball firing direction side and providing the cutting edge of the cutting blade 243 in a direction opposite to the game ball firing direction, the yarn member of the illegal ball can be further twisted. It is possible to reliably cut.

FIG. 12A is a front view of the foul ball catching unit 210, and FIG. 12B is an exploded perspective view of the foul ball catching unit 210. FIG. 13A is a top perspective view of the foul ball catching unit 210, and FIG. 13B is a rear perspective view of the foul ball catching unit 210. 14A is a rear view (rear view) of the foul ball catching unit 210, FIG. 14B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 14A, and FIG. FIG. 15 is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the foul ball catching unit 210 includes a base member 211 and a parts member 212 mounted on a rear surface side of the base member 211. At the front side of the base member 211, an alerting indication 211a for alerting the hook 210a for locking the foul ball catching unit 210 to the inner frame unit 12a is provided.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the foul ball catching unit 210 has a foul ball (a game ball that has flown back without being launched into the game area 32 despite being fired) on the rear surface side of the base member 211. A first ball ball inlet 213a and a second ball ball inlet 213b into which the game ball flows, a payout ball inlet 213c into which a game ball paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full flows, and an inlet 213a. A ball outlet 213d for discharging the game balls flowing into 213b and 213c to the outside of foul ball catching unit 210 is provided. The game ball discharged from the ball outlet 213d is supplied to the lower plate 23.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14A, for example, a foul ball catching unit 210 includes a first flow path 214a on the rear surface side of the base member 211, through which a game ball flowing into the first foul ball inflow port 213a flows down, A second flow path 214b through which game balls flowing into the payout ball inflow port 213c flow down, and a third flow path 214c for guiding game balls passing through the first flow path 214a and the second flow path 214b to a ball flow outlet 213d. And a fourth flow path 214d for guiding the game ball flowing into the second foul ball inlet 213b to the ball outlet 213d.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the base member 211 is provided with a window 211b for preventing static electricity from staying. The window portion 211b is an opening that penetrates the base member 211 in the front-rear direction. It is possible.
In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), a reinforcing rib 211c for reinforcing the base member 211 is provided on the front side of the base member 211, on the rear side of which a flow path through which a game ball flows is provided. Have been. The reinforcing rib 211c also has a role of preventing sink in molding.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the part member 212 is provided with a protrusion 212a projecting upward and a reinforcing rib 212b for the protrusion 212a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, the protrusion 212a is disposed between the first foul ball inlet 213a and the second foul ball inlet 213b. The second foul ball inflow port 213b is disposed on the right side (on the side of the hitting ball firing device 240) of the first foul ball inflow port 213a. It flows into the 2-far ball inlet 213b. On the other hand, the foul sphere that has surpassed the projection 212a at the time of firing flows into the first foul ball inlet 213a when it has not been able to cross the projection 212a at the time of backflow, and may also pass over the projection 212a at the time of backflow. When it is completed, it flows into the second foul ball inlet 213b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), when a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thread is attached flows into the first foul ball inlet 213a as a foul ball, the foul ball catching unit 210 sandwiches the thread. A part 215 is provided.
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as described above, a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thin thread (thread member) is attached is fired into the game area 32, and the thread member is manipulated from the upper plate 21 to be illegal. In some cases, a fraudulent act (hereinafter, referred to as “first fraudulent act”) that causes a prize port or the like to win is performed. The first misconduct can be avoided by the cutting blade 243 of the hit ball firing device 240.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, two game balls are further connected by a thin thread (thread member), and one of the game balls is fired to intentionally make a foul ball (that is, a foul ball catch is intentionally made). (After being collected by the unit 210 and dropped on the lower plate 23), the other game ball is launched into the game area 32, and the thread member is operated from the lower plate 23 to illegally win a winning opening or the like. Acts (hereinafter referred to as “second fraudulent acts”) may be performed. The second misconduct is such that the hand operating the thread member is hidden by the lower plate 23 and is difficult to see, and the operation of operating the thread member is mistaken for the operation of moving the game ball from the lower plate 23 to the upper plate 21. It is hard to be found for a reason.

  In the case of the second misconduct, the firing force of one of the game balls fired first is weak, so that even if the thread member cuts into the gap 243d of the cutting blade 243, it is not cut. Furthermore, even if the thread member cuts into the gap 243d of the cutting blade 243, the other game ball is fired thereafter, and the thread member comes off the cutting blade 243. Therefore, the second misconduct cannot be avoided with the cutting blade 243. As a countermeasure against such second misconduct, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a sandwiching portion 215 for sandwiching a thread member of an illegal ball.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 14B, the sandwiching portion 215 includes a front protruding portion 216 provided on the base member 211 and a protruding front portion provided on the parts member 212. This is a gap formed (boundary) with the rear protruding portion 217.
The first flow path 214a provided on the rear surface side of the base member 211 is a flow path formed so as to guide the game ball flowing into the first foul ball inlet 213a to the left and then to the bottom. The upstream portion (the portion for guiding the game ball to the left) of the first flow path 214a is provided between the base member 211 and the part member 212, and the game ball projects when the ball passes through the upstream portion. 217 rolls on the upper surface (that is, above the sandwiching portion 215).

  The third flow path 214c provided on the rear surface side of the base member 211 is a flow path formed so as to guide game balls from the first flow path 214a and the second flow path 214b to the right. The third flow path 214c is provided below the protrusions 216 and 217 (ie, below the sandwiching part 215). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inlet 213a moves to the left above the pinching portion 215, falls from the protrusions 216 and 217, and then moves to the right below the pinching portion 215. And is discharged from the ball outlet 213d.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14B, the sandwiching portion 215 is a slit extending along the left-right direction. Therefore, even when the game ball rolls above the pinching portion 215 (flows down the upstream portion of the first channel 214a), it rolls below the pinching portion 215 (the third channel 214c Also when flowing down, it flows down along the extending direction of the sandwiching portion 215.
For example, as shown in FIG. 14C, the right part of the front surface of the rear protrusion 217 (the surface facing the front protrusion 216) is the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 (the surface facing the rear protrusion 217). Is in contact with On the other hand, the left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217 is an inclined surface that gradually separates from the front protruding portion 216. That is, between the left portion of the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 and the left portion of the front surface of the rear protrusion 217, a tapered sandwiching portion 215 (gap) having a left end opened and a right end closed is formed. ing. Therefore, the thread member of the illegal ball can enter from the left end of the sandwiching portion 215.
Further, the front end surface 216a (left side surface) of the front protruding portion 216 and the front end surface 217a (left side surface) of the rear protruding portion 217 are formed on the holding portion 215 so as to guide the thread member of the illegal ball to the holding portion 215. It is formed as a slope that slopes downward.

The left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217 (that is, the inclined surface gradually separating from the front protruding portion 216) includes a first inclined surface 217b and a second inclined surface 217c whose inclination is gentler than the first inclined surface 217b. Consists of
The first inclined surface 217b having a steeper inclination is provided on the left end (open end) side of the sandwiching portion 215. Accordingly, at the open end of the sandwiching portion 215, the separation distance between the front projecting portion 216 and the rear projecting portion 217 can be increased, so that the thread member of the illegal ball can easily enter the sandwiching portion 215.
The second inclined surface 217c with a gentler inclination is provided on the right end (closed end) side of the sandwiching portion 215. This makes it possible to increase the length of the portion where the force for pinching the illegal ball thread member is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, thereby effectively pinching the illegal ball thread member, making operation of the thread member difficult. Not only that, it is also possible to make the recovery of the thread member difficult.

  In the sandwiching mechanism configured as described above, of the two illegal balls connected by the thread member, the illegal ball fired first flows down the third channel 214c via the first channel 214a as a foul ball. At this time, the thread member enters from the left end of the sandwiching portion 215. Then, the thread member that has entered the pinching portion 215 is pulled by the downward force of the illegal ball and pinched by the pinching portion 215. Since the pinching portion 215 is provided along the flowing direction of the game ball, it is possible to pinch the thread member of the illegal ball without hindering the flowing of the game ball.

  The first flow path 214a is configured to guide the game ball flowing into the first foul ball inflow port 213a to the left above the sandwiching portion 215, and then supply the game ball below the sandwiching portion 215. The third flow path 214c is configured to guide the game ball supplied below the sandwiching portion 215 to the right below the sandwiching portion 215. And the sandwiching part 215 is arrange | positioned so that an open end may face the left side. In this way, the open end of the sandwiching portion 215 is provided in the same direction as the flowing direction of the game ball above the sandwiching portion 215, and is opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball below the sandwiching portion 215. By providing, it is possible to reliably sandwich the thread member of the illegal ball.

  The first foul ball inlet 213a into which the foul ball flows and the ball outlet 213d from which the foul ball is discharged are both disposed on the right side of the open end of the holding portion 215, and the holding portion 215 Has a tapered shape from the left side to the right side. Therefore, when one of the illegal balls previously fired flows in from the first ball inlet 213a and is discharged from the ball outlet 213d, the thread member of the ball becomes substantially rectangular in the ball catch unit 210. It becomes a state bent in a shape. As a result, the other illegal ball is fired into the game area 32 to pull the other end (the other illegal ball side) of the thread member, or the thread member is operated from the lower plate 23 to cause the thread member to operate. Of the thread member is moved to the right (closed end side) by pulling one end side (one of the illegal ball side that has become a foul ball) of the thread member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably sandwich the thread member of the illegal ball.

  Specifically, for example, the one end of the illegally fired ball flows in from the first foul ball inlet 213a and is discharged from the ball outlet 213d, so that the yarn member has an open end of the pinching portion 215. , And is sandwiched between the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 and the first inclined surface 217 b of the rear protrusion 217. Next, when the other illegal ball is fired into the game area 32, the other end is pulled by the firing force of the other illegal ball, so that the first inclined surface of the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 and the rear surface of the rear protrusion 217. 217b is moved to a position sandwiched by the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 and the second inclined surface 217c of the rear protrusion 217, and is sandwiched by the sandwich 215. Thereafter, the one end side of the thread member is pulled by being operated from the lower plate 23, so that the thread member is sandwiched between the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 and the second inclined surface 217 c of the rear protrusion 217 toward the closed end. Move around. Therefore, when the operation from the lower plate 23 of the thread member is repeated, the sandwiching of the thread member by the sandwiching portion 215 gradually becomes tight, and the thread member finally stops moving, so that the operation of the thread member becomes difficult. In addition, it becomes difficult to collect the thread member. Therefore, since there is a possibility that evidence of wrongdoing may remain, the second wrongdoing can be effectively avoided.

Instead of providing an inclined surface on the front surface of the rear projecting portion 217, it is also possible to provide an inclined surface on the rear surface of the front projecting portion 216 to form the sandwiching portion 215. It is also possible to form the sandwiching portion 215 by providing an inclined surface on both the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217. However, when the thread member of the illegal ball is operated from the lower plate 23, the thread member is pressed against the rear surface of the front protrusion 216. Therefore, if an inclined surface is provided on the rear surface of the front protrusion 216, the thread member is May be guided in a direction away from the sandwiching portion 215. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sandwiching portion 215 is formed by providing the inclined surfaces 217 b and 217 c on the front surface of the rear projecting portion 217 without providing the inclined surface on the rear surface of the front projecting portion 216.
In addition, irregularities may be provided on a surface of the foul ball catching unit 210 that contacts the illegal ball thread member (for example, the left portion of the rear surface of the front projection 216 and / or the left portion of the front surface of the rear projection 217). . Thereby, the frictional resistance between the foul ball catching unit 210 and the thread member increases, and the thread member is easily caught, so that the second wrongdoing can be effectively avoided.

  Further, the second misconduct using the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inlet 213a can be avoided by the sandwiching portion 215 of the foul ball catch unit 210. On the other hand, the foul ball may flow into the second foul ball inlet 213b, and the second misconduct using the game ball that has flowed into the second foul ball inlet 213b cannot be avoided by the pinching portion 215. Therefore, as a countermeasure against the second misconduct using the game ball flowing into the second foul ball inlet 213b, for example, the upper end of the rib 211d (see FIG. 13A) forming the second foul ball inlet 213b. May be provided with a notch.

Further, for example, the lower ends of the ribs 211e, 211f, and 211g (see FIG. 13B) forming the spherical outlet 213d, corners formed by the ribs 211e and 211g, and ribs 211f and 211g. Notches may be provided in the corners and the like to be formed. As a result, the thread member of the illegal ball becomes more difficult to operate, so that it is possible to effectively avoid the second illegal act using the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inlet 213a.
Further, by providing notches at the lower ends of the ribs 211e, 211f, 211g and at the corners formed by these ribs, the notches are not provided at the upper ends of the ribs 211d, etc., so that the second foul ball inlet 213b can be cut. It is possible to avoid the second fraudulent activity using the flowing game balls. In addition, notches are provided at the lower ends of the ribs 211e, 211f, and 211g and at the corners formed by these ribs, and the notches are provided at the upper ends of the ribs 211d, so that the ribs 211d flow into the second foul ball inlet 213b. It is possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent act using a game ball.
Further, the second foul ball inlet 213b may not be provided. That is, all the foul balls may flow into the first foul ball inlet 213a.

<Upper plate unit>
FIG. 15A is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate unit 153, and FIG. 15B is a plan view of the upper plate unit 153.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the upper plate unit 153 includes a unit main body 260 and an effect button 25 mounted on a central portion of the unit main body 260 from above. . The upper plate unit 153 is installed below the glass frame 15 and is configured as a projecting unit that projects forward of the gaming machine 10.
For example, as shown in FIG. 15A, an opening 260a is formed at the center of the upper surface of the unit main body 260. The opening 260a is for enabling the effect button 25 to be inserted into the unit main body 260, and the lower part of the effect button 25 is disposed in the unit main body 260 via the opening 260a.

The effect button 25 is detachably attached to the unit main body 260 via a shaft portion 25b protruding from the bottom portion of the effect button 25 and a support member 260b protruding from the bottom portion of the unit main body 260. Provided. Each support member 260b of the unit main body 260 is formed at a position corresponding to each shaft portion 25b of the effect button 25, and a screw hole for a screw that connects the shaft portion 25b and the support member 260b is formed inside. Have.
Further, the support member 260b is configured to be inclined forward of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the effect button 25 supported by the support member 260b is also inclined forward of the gaming machine 10. Thereby, the operation surface of the effect button 25 can be arranged toward the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10, and the operability can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, a lending button (ball lending button) 27a, a return button (discharge button) 27b, and a balance display (balance display unit) 27c are provided on the upper surface of the unit main body 260. , An upper plate operation lever 27d, a portable terminal holder 28, a volume adjustment button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like.
The mobile terminal holder 28 is provided with a plurality (three in this embodiment) of grooves 28a. Each groove 28a is arranged so that the extending direction is different from each other with respect to the left-right direction. Therefore, the player can place the portable terminal in the portable terminal holder 28 in a stable state by selecting the groove 28a according to the size of the portable terminal.

FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the effect button 25.
For example, as shown in FIG. 16, the effect button 25 includes a button unit base 251, a button lower base 252, a reflector base 253, a reflector 254, a button inner lens 255, a button inner lens 256, and a button The camera includes a lens decoration 257, a button lens 258, and a button frame 259. Among these members, the button lens 258, the button lens decoration 257, and the button lower base 252 sink when the effect button 25 is pressed.

A vibration motor 251a is attached to the center of the button unit base 251. When the vibration motor 251a operates, the whole effect button 25 vibrates. That is, the vibration function of vibrating the effect button 25 is achieved by the vibration motor 251a. The button unit base 251 is provided with an effect button switch 25a.
The button lower base 252 is a member disposed on the upper surface side of the button unit base 251. (In the case of the present embodiment, four) of the urging members 252b. The urging member 252b is, for example, a spring, and its tip contacts the button unit base 251 to urge the base body 252a away from the button unit base 251 (upward).

When the effect button 25 is pressed, the base body 252a moves in a direction against the urging force of the urging member 252b. That is, when the effect button 25 is pressed, the base body 252a moves in a direction approaching the button unit base 251 (downward). The buffer member 251b is attached.
A light-shielding plate 252c is attached to the bottom surface of the base main body 252a. Are arranged between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the effect button switch 25a attached to the button unit base 251. The effect button switch 25a outputs a signal indicating that the effect button 25 has been pressed when the light from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is blocked by the light blocking plate 252c.

The reflector base 253 is a substantially annular member inclined downward toward the central opening 253a, and is engaged with the button unit base 251 from above the button lower base 252. The upper surface of the reflector base 253 is subjected to irregular reflection processing (irregular processing) for reflecting light in multiple directions.
The reflector 254 is a member having an inverted truncated cone shape whose upper and lower surfaces are opened, and is engaged with the upper lens 256 inside the button while being arranged inside the lower lens 255 inside the button. The surface of the reflector 254 is subjected to reflection processing for reflecting light.

An LED board 252d on which a plurality of (in this embodiment, nine) LEDs are mounted is mounted inside the base main body 252a of the button lower base 252. One of the LEDs mounted on the LED board 252d is disposed at a position that fits in the lower opening 254a of the reflector 254, and the remaining LEDs are positioned at a position that fits in the central opening 253a of the reflector base 253. The reflector 254 is provided at a position surrounding the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254.
Of the LEDs mounted on the LED board 252d, a part of the light from the LEDs arranged at a position that fits inside the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254 directly enters the upper lens 256 inside the button, and Is reflected by the reflector 254 and enters the button inner upper lens 256.
Also, of the LEDs mounted on the LED board 252d, the light from the LED disposed at a position surrounding the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254 is reflected by the reflector 254, and the upper surface of the reflector base 253 (where irregular reflection processing is performed). Incident on the button inner lenses 255 and 256.

The button inner lower lens 255 is a member capable of transmitting light, and is engaged with the reflector base 253 in a state of being disposed inside the reflector base 253.
The button inner upper lens 256 is a member that can transmit light, and is engaged with the button inner lower lens 255.
The button lens decoration 257 is a member that can transmit light, and is sandwiched between the button lower base 252 and the button lens 258. On the upper surface of the button lens decoration 257, characters (texts of "PUSH" in the present embodiment) and patterns are provided.
The button lens 258 is a transparent member that can transmit light, and is engaged with the button lower base 252 from above the button lens decoration 257.
The button frame 259 is a member disposed around the button lens 258, and is engaged with the button unit base 251 from above the button lens 258.

As described above, the in-button lenses 255 and 256, the button lens decoration 257, and the button lens 258 are members that can transmit light. Therefore, the light from the LED board 252d (that is, the light incident on the buttons inside lenses 255, 256) passes through the buttons inside lenses 255, 256, the button lens decoration 257, and the button lens 258, and the outside of the effect button 25. Released to
Further, since the button lens 258 is a transparent member, characters and patterns formed by irregularities provided on the upper surface of the button lens decoration 257 can be visually recognized from outside the effect button 25 through the button lens 258.

FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the unit main body 260.
For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the unit main body 260 includes an upper plate base 261, a button fixing member 262 mounted on the lower surface side of the upper plate base 261, and an upper plate mounted on the front side of the upper plate base 261. A frame 263, an operation panel 264 mounted on the upper surface side of the upper plate frame 263, a button base 265 mounted on the lower surface side of the upper plate frame 263, a light emitting decorative member 266 a mounted on the upper plate frame 263, A light emitting main body member 266b mounted on the upper plate frame 263 corresponding to the light emitting decorative member 266a.

The upper plate base 261 is a member that forms the upper plate 21. In addition, the portable terminal holder 28 is formed on the upper plate base 261, and the lower speaker 19b on the left side is mounted.
The button fixing member 262 is a member for fixing the lending button 27a, the return button 27b, and the balance indicator 27c at predetermined positions on the operation panel 264.
The upper plate frame 263 is a member disposed along the front edge of the upper plate 21. An upright wall 263a is provided at the left front end and the right front end of the upper plate frame 263, respectively. The upright wall 263a is provided with a plurality (six in the case of the present embodiment) of through holes 263a1.

The light emitting decorative member 266a is a member mounted on the front side of the upright wall 263a of the upper plate frame 263, and is used to fix the upper plate lens capable of transmitting light and the upper lens at a predetermined position of the upright wall 263a. And a lens frame.
The light emitting main body member 266b is a member mounted on the rear side of the upright wall 263a of the upper plate frame 263, and includes an LED board and a cover for fixing the LED board at a predetermined position on the upright wall 263a. Is done. The light emitting main body member 266b includes a plurality of (six in the case of the present embodiment) LEDs, and each LED corresponds to each through hole 263a1 of the upright wall 263a in a 1: 1 relationship. That is, the light from the LED of the light emitting main body member 266b is incident on the upper dish lens of the light emitting decorative member 266a through the through hole 263a1 corresponding to the LED, passes through the upper dish lens, and is outside the unit main body 260. Released to

The operation panel 264 is a member arranged around the effect button 25. A lending button 27a, a return button 27b, and a balance display 27c are mounted on the upper right side of the operation panel 264, and a lending button 27a, a return button 27b, and a balance display are provided on the lower right side of the operation panel 264. A board (not shown) for the container 27c is mounted. A volume control button 27e and a cross key 29 are mounted on the left upper surface of the operation panel 264, and a board for the volume control button 27e and the cross key 29 is mounted on the left lower surface of the operation panel 264. (Not shown) is attached.
At least the upper surface of the operation panel 264 can reflect light. Specifically, for example, the surface of the operation panel 264 is a glossy surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the effect button 25 can be reflected by the operation panel 264, so that the effect of the effect button 25 can be enhanced.
The button base 265 is a member disposed below the effect button 25, and includes a support member 260 b that supports the effect button 25. On the upper surface side of the button base 265, an upper plate operation lever 27d and a reinforcing plate 265a supporting the operation panel 264 are mounted.

The upper plate unit 153 includes a water storage mechanism that stores the liquid when the beverage possessed by the player is spilled or the like and the liquid is applied to the effect button 25.
As described above, the upper plate unit 153 is installed below the glass frame 15 and is configured as a protruding unit that protrudes forward of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, when a drink or the like possessed by the player is spilled, there is a high possibility that the beverage will fall on the upper plate unit 153. An effect button 25 is provided on the upper plate unit 153. If the effect button 25 is broken due to the liquid applied to the effect button 25, an effect using the effect button 25 (an effect that causes the effect button 25 to emit light, an effect) There is a problem that the effect of vibrating the button 25, the effect of interposing the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, etc.) cannot be executed, and the interest of the game is reduced. As a countermeasure against such a problem, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a water storage mechanism capable of guiding the liquid to a relatively safe place and storing the liquid when the liquid is applied to the effect button 25. I have.

Here, the relatively safe place is a space in the upper plate unit 153 that hardly affects various electric components in the upper plate unit 153 even when the liquid is stored. The water storage mechanism of the present embodiment is a mechanism for storing liquid inside the upper plate unit 153. On the other hand, inside the upper plate unit 153, the vibration motor 251a in the effect button 25, the LED board 252d, the effect button switch 25a, the LED board of the light emitting body member 266b, the board for the volume control button 27e and the cross key 29, Various electrical components such as a relay board 153a for relaying the effect and the effect control device 300, a board for the lending button 27a, the return button 27b, and the balance display 27c are provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, of the space in the upper plate unit 153, a space that does not easily affect these electric components even when the liquid is stored is used as a water storage unit of the water storage mechanism.
The relay board 153a is one of the electric components arranged inside the upper plate unit 153, which is connected to the effect control device 300 (the vibration motor 251a, the LED board 252d, the effect button switch 25a, the LED board of the light emitting main body member 266b, The volume control button 27e and a board related to the cross key 29 are connected via a connector 153a1. In this way, by connecting the components connected to the effect control device 300, the wiring space can be reduced. The relay board 153a is attached to the rear end of the button base 265, for example, as shown in FIG. That is, the relay board 153a is located on the rear side (the upper plate base 261 side) of the water storage units (front water storage units 267a and 267b (described later), left water storage units 268a and 268b (described later), and right water storage units 269a and 269b (described later)). ).
The relay board 153a may be connected not only to the effect control device 300 but also to a device other than the effect control device 300 (such as a board related to the lending button 27a, the return button 27b, and the balance display 27c). good. This makes it possible to further reduce the wiring space.

18A is a front view (front view) of the effect button 25 with the button frame 259 removed, and FIG. 18B is a perspective view of the effect button 25 with the button frame 259 removed. FIG. 18C is a plan view (top view) of the effect button 25 without the button frame 259.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 18A to 18C, the button lower base 252 has a front guide recess 252e, a left guide recess 252f, and a right guide recess 252g on the outer surface of the base body 252a. ing. The button lens 258 has a groove 258b along the outer periphery of the dome-shaped lens body 258a. Therefore, the liquid applied to the effect button 25 moves to the groove 258b along the surface of the lens body 258a.

  The liquid in the groove 258b moves to the guide recesses 252e, 252f, and 252g along the groove 258b. That is, the groove 258b is a guide path that guides the liquid to the guide recesses 252e, 252f, and 252g. The effect button 25 is installed in a state of being inclined forward of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the liquid in the groove 258b (the groove 258b located on the front side of the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 18C) with respect to the left guide recess 252f and the right guide recess 252g is guided to the front guide recess 252e by the groove 258b. Is done. The liquid in the groove 258b (the groove 258b on the rear side of the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 18C) with respect to the left guiding concave 252f and the right guiding concave 252g causes the left guiding concave 252f by the groove 258b. Or, it is guided to the right guiding recess 252g.

19A is a front view of the upper plate unit 153, FIG. 19B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19A, and FIG. () Is an enlarged view of a main part.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 19B and 19C, the upper plate frame 263 has a front guiding step 263b at the front end. The liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e of the effect button 25 is guided to the front guide step 263b of the upper plate frame 263 by the front guide recess 252e. That is, the front guiding recess 252e is a guiding port for guiding the liquid to the front guiding step 263b. Specifically, the liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e moves from the upper end of the front guide recess 252e to the front end of the front guide recess 252e (the tip of the bottom upper surface of the front guide recess 252e), and from the front end. It falls to the front guidance step part 263b.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C, a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) ribs 252e1 are provided in the front guiding recess 252e. For example, as shown in FIG. 19C, the front surface of the rib 252e1 has an inclined surface substantially orthogonal to a horizontal plane in a state where the effect button 25 is normally installed (a state inclined to the front side of the gaming machine 10). Has become. Therefore, the liquid that has moved to the front guiding recess 252e can move from the upper end of the front guiding recess 252e along the front surface of the rib 252e1 to the front end of the front guiding recess 252e at the shortest distance. The liquid can be smoothly guided to the guiding step 263b.

The liquid that has moved to the front guiding step portion 263b is guided by the front guiding step portion 263b to a space (first front water storage portion 267a) formed between the upper plate frame 263 and the operation panel 264, and It collects in 1 front side water storage part 267a. When the amount of water stored in the first front water storage section 267a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows from the first front water storage section 267a to the space formed between the upper plate frame 263 and the button base 265 (second space). It moves to the front side water storage part 267b) and accumulates in the second front side water storage part 267b.
That is, first, the liquid flows into the first front water storage section 267a, and after the amount of water stored in the first front water storage section 267a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second front water storage section 267b. Therefore, the inflow of the liquid into the second front-side water storage portion 267b (the flow of the liquid toward the effect button 25) can be delayed by the first front-side water storage portion 267a.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 19C, when the effect button 25 is normally installed, the front end of the front guiding recess 252e (the tip of the bottom upper surface of the front guiding recess 252e) is higher than the upper end of the front guiding step 263b. Are also located on the front side, and are located on the rear side of the front end of the front guiding step portion 263b. Thus, the liquid that falls from the front end of the front guide recess 252e can be reliably flowed into the front guide step 263b. That is, since the liquid falling from the front end of the front guiding recess 252e does not directly flow into the second front water storage part 267b, the liquid flows into the second front water storage part 267b (the liquid flowing to the effect button 25 side). Flow) can be reliably delayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19C, for example, when the effect button 25 is normally installed, the bottom lower surface 252e2 of the front guiding recess 252e is inclined upward toward the base end (rear side). Thus, the liquid in the front guide recess 252e can be reliably dropped from the front end of the front guide recess 252e. That is, since the liquid in the front guiding recess 252e does not flow directly to the second front water storage part 267b along the bottom lower surface 252e2, the liquid flows into the second front water storage part 267b (to the effect button 25 side). Liquid flow) can be reliably delayed.

20 (a) is a plan view of the upper plate unit 153, FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 20 (a), and FIG. () Is an enlarged view of a main part. FIG. 21A is a plan view of the button base 265 in a state where the reinforcing plate 265a is mounted, and FIG. 21B is a plan view of the button base 265 in a state where the reinforcing plate 265a is not mounted. is there.
The upper plate unit 153 is a space that is hardly affected by various electric components even if liquid is stored, that is, a space used as a water storage unit of the water storage mechanism, in addition to the front water storage units 267a and 267b, the left water storage units 268a and 268b and the right water storage units 268a and 268b. Water storage units 269a and 269b are provided. The left water reservoirs 268a and 268b and the right water reservoirs 269a and 269b are provided in the button base 265.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 20C, a space located below the left reinforcing plate 265 a among the spaces in the button base 265 is the first left water storage portion 268 a, The space located below the right reinforcing plate 265a is the first right water storage section 269a. That is, in FIG. 21 (b), the hatched portions are the first left water reservoir 268a and the first right water reservoir 269a.
Also, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 (c), in the space inside the button base 265, it is a space adjacent to the first left water reservoir 268a and located to the right of the first left water reservoir 268a. The space (the space located below the effect button 25) is the second left water reservoir 268b, the space adjacent to the first right water reservoir 269a, and the space located to the left of the first right water reservoir 269a ( The space located below the effect button 25) is the second right water reservoir 269b. That is, in FIG. 21 (a), the hatched portions are the second left water reservoir 268b and the second right water reservoir 269b.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20C, the operation panel 264 has a left guiding step 264a and a right guiding step 264b at an edge of the opening 260a. The liquid that has moved to the left guiding recess 252f of the effect button 25 is guided to the left guiding step 264a of the operation panel 264 by the left guiding recess 252f. That is, the left guiding recess 252f is a guiding port for guiding the liquid to the left guiding step 264a. The liquid that has moved to the right guiding recess 252g of the effect button 25 is guided to the right guiding step 264b of the operation panel 264 by the right guiding recess 252g. That is, the right guiding recess 252g is a guiding port for guiding the liquid to the right guiding step 264b.

The liquid that has moved to the left guiding step portion 264a of the operation panel 264 is guided to the first left water storing portion 268a by the left guiding step portion 264a and the left reinforcing plate 265a, and accumulates in the first left water storing portion 268a. . Then, when the amount of water stored in the first left water storage portion 268a reaches the upper limit, the liquid moves from the first left water storage portion 268a to the second left water storage portion 268b, and enters the second left water storage portion 268b. Collect.
That is, first, the liquid flows into the first left water reservoir 268a, and after the amount of water stored in the first left water reservoir 268a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second left water reservoir 268b. Therefore, the inflow of the liquid into the second left water storage portion 268b (the flow of the liquid toward the effect button 25) can be delayed by the first left water storage portion 268a.

In addition, the liquid that has moved to the right guiding step portion 264b of the operation panel 264 is guided to the first right water storage portion 269a by the right guiding step portion 264b and the right reinforcing plate 265a, and the liquid inside the first right water storage portion 269a is provided. Accumulate. When the amount of water stored in the first right-side water storage section 269a reaches the upper limit, the liquid moves from the first right-side water storage section 269a to the second right-side water storage section 269b and enters the second right-side water storage section 269b. Collect.
That is, first, the liquid flows into the first right water reservoir 269a, and after the amount of water stored in the first right water reservoir 269a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second right water reservoir 269b. Therefore, the inflow of the liquid into the second right-side water storage section 269b (the flow of the liquid toward the effect button 25) can be delayed by the first right-side water storage section 269a.
In addition, since the button base 265 is inclined forward (see FIG. 19B), when the amount of water stored in the second left water reservoir 268b or the second right water reservoir 269b reaches the upper limit, the liquid becomes The water moves from the second left water reservoir 268b and the second right water reservoir 269b to the second front water reservoir 267b, and accumulates in the second front water reservoir 267b.

The liquid stored in the water storage units (front water storage units 267a and 267b, left water storage units 268a and 268b, and right water storage units 269a and 269b) of the water storage mechanism evaporates naturally. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since various electric components are provided in the upper plate unit 153, evaporation of the liquid in the water storage portion can be promoted by heat from these components.
In addition, a drain port may be provided so that the liquid in the water storage unit can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 10. Since the lower plate 23 is disposed at the lower left of the upper plate unit 153, from the viewpoint of preventing the liquid discharged from the drain port from flowing into the lower plate 23, the drain port is connected to the upper plate. It is preferably provided on the right side of the unit 153. Further, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the drain port according to an operation of a player or the like may be attached to the drain port.

  In the water storage mechanism configured as described above, the effect button 25 is formed by the groove 258b provided on the button lens 258 of the effect button 25 and the guiding recesses 252e, 252f, 252g provided on the button lower base 252 of the effect button 25. The splashed liquid can be guided to a relatively safe place in the upper plate unit 153 without entering the inside of the effect button 25 (the inside of the button unit base 251 to the button lens 258). Therefore, even if a liquid is applied to the effect button 25, the effect button 25 is unlikely to break down. Therefore, an effect using the effect button 25 (an effect that causes the effect button 25 to emit light, an effect that vibrates the effect button 25, an effect button 25 that is performed by a player). Can be reduced.

  Further, a relatively safe place in the upper plate unit 153 is located between the second water storage portion (the second front water storage portion 267b, the second left water storage portion 268b, and the second right water storage portion 269b) and the second water storage portion. The liquid guided into the upper plate unit 153 is divided into the first water storage part (the first front water storage part 267a, the first left water storage part 268a, and the first right water storage part 269a) located far from the effect button 25, First, the water can be stored in the second water storage section after the amount of water stored in the first water storage section reaches the upper limit. That is, the inflow (flow) of a predetermined amount of liquid (for example, the maximum amount of water stored in the first water storage unit) into the second water storage unit can be delayed by the first water storage unit. In this way, the inflow of the liquid into the second water storage unit (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25) by the first water storage unit is delayed, so that the inconvenience that the effect using the effect button 25 cannot be performed can be prevented. It is possible to surely reduce it.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19B, an effect button switch 25a is provided above the second front water storage section 267b. Therefore, when the amount of water stored in the second front water storage section 267b reaches the upper limit, the effect button switch 25a may come into contact with the liquid and break down. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20C, for example, a vibration motor 251a is disposed above the second left water reservoir 268b and the second right water reservoir 269b. Therefore, when the amount of water stored in the second left water reservoir 268b or the second right water reservoir 269b reaches the upper limit, the vibration motor 251a may come into contact with the liquid and break down.
In contrast, in the present embodiment, the inflow of the liquid into the second water storage unit can be delayed by the first water storage unit. Therefore, during the delay, it is possible to take measures such as wiping the liquid on the effect button 25 so that the amount of water stored in the second water storage unit does not reach the upper limit. It is possible to reliably reduce the occurrence of inconveniences, such as the inability to execute the effect in which the operation of the effect button 25 by the player is interposed, and the inability to execute the effect of vibrating the effect button 25 due to the failure of the vibration motor 251a. Becomes

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine including the operating means (upper plate unit 153) having the operating section (effect button 25) operable by the player, the operation to the operating section is performed. A predetermined effect (for example, a pre-reading effect to be described later) can be executed in response to the instruction. It is configured to include a means (groove 258b, guide recesses 252e, 252f, 252g) and a delay means (first water storage parts 267a, 268a, 269a) for delaying the flow of the fluid induced by the guide means. (See FIGS. 19 and 20). Specifically, the guiding means guides the fluid to the delay means, and the delay means delays the flow of the fluid to the inside of the operation unit (that is, the second water storage parts 267b, 268b, 269b).
Therefore, even if a fluid (for example, a liquid) is applied to the operation unit (the effect button 25), the operation unit has a structure that is unlikely to break down. Interestingness is unlikely to drop.

FIG. 22A is a right side view of the front frame unit 15a for explaining the visible window 15c, and FIG. 22B is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 22A. It is. FIG. 23A is a rear perspective view of the front frame unit 15a for explaining the viewing window 15c, and FIG. 23B is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. FIG.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, when the glass frame 15 is opened with the front frame 12 closed, the viewing window 15c (between the front frame main body 151 and the upper plate unit 153) is opened. The inside of the upper plate unit 153 can be visually recognized from the outside of the glass frame 15 through a gap (not shown). Since the viewing window 15c is provided on the open end (right end) side of the glass frame 15, the right side area inside the upper plate unit 153 is particularly easily visible through the viewing window 15c.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17, an upper plate operation lever 27 d that is operated to cause a game ball in the upper plate 21 to flow down to the lower plate 23 is provided on a right portion of the button base 265. Therefore, a portion of the upper plate operating lever 27d that is disposed inside the upper plate unit 153 (hereinafter, referred to as a “base end portion of the upper plate operating lever 27d”) is located within the right region inside the upper plate unit 153. Since it is located, for example, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, it can be visually recognized through the viewing window 15c. That is, the operation of the upper plate operation lever 27d can be visually checked through the viewing window 15c.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, one of the two light emitting main body members 266b is mounted on the right upright wall 263a of the upper plate frame 263. Therefore, since the one light emitting main body member 266b (right light emitting main body member 266b) is located in the right region inside the upper plate unit 153, for example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). , Through the viewing window 15c. Further, when the right light emitting main body member 266b emits light, the inside of the upper plate unit 153 (particularly, the right region inside the upper plate unit 153) is brightly illuminated with light leaked from the light emitting main body member 266b. This makes it easier to visually check the inside of the upper plate unit 153 via the viewing window 15c (for example, to visually check the operation of the upper plate operation lever 27d).
Further, when the light emitting main body member 266b on the right side emits light, the light emission mode can be visually checked from the viewing window 15c. Error or the like can be recognized. Specifically, for example, when the light emission mode corresponding to the door opening error is red and the light emission mode corresponding to the payout error is green, is the right light emitting body member 266b emitting red light? That is, it is confirmed from the viewing window 15c whether the door opening error alone has occurred or the light emission is yellow (= red + green) (that is, whether the door opening error and the payout error have occurred). Therefore, it is possible to recognize a currently occurring error without closing and confirming the glass frame 15.

FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame unit 15a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A, 6B and 24, the front frame unit 15a is mounted on the front frame main body 151, and on the upper left and upper right portions on the front side of the front frame main body 151, respectively. Speaker decoration 152, an upper plate unit 153 mounted on a lower portion on the front side of the front frame main body 151, and a front frame light emitting unit mounted on each of the left and right portions on the front side of the front frame main body 151. 154 and cover members 155 attached to the upper left and upper right portions on the rear side of the front frame main body 151, respectively. The front frame light emitting unit 154 is a type of the frame decoration device 18.

FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the right front frame light emitting unit 154. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the LED substrate 181, the reflector 183, and the inner lens 184 in the right front frame light emitting unit 154. Since the configuration of the left front frame light emitting unit 154 and the configuration of the right front frame light emitting unit 154 are substantially the same, here, the right front frame light emitting unit 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The description is omitted, and the description of the left front frame light emitting unit 154 is omitted.
For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the right front frame light emitting unit 154 includes an LED board 181 fixed to the front frame main body 151, and an LED board 181 disposed in front of the LED board 181 and fixed to the front frame main body 151. A transparent back cover 182, a reflector 183 and an inner lens 184 disposed in front of the back cover 182 and fixed to the back cover 182, and disposed to the right of the inner lens 184 and stopped at the inner lens 184. A side cover 185 to be attached and an outer lens 186 disposed to the left of the inner lens 184 and fixed to the side cover 185 are provided. The outer lens 186 is engaged with the reflector 183 while covering the reflector 183 and the inner lens 184. The inner lens 184 and the outer lens 186 are fixed to the same position on the side cover 185.

Some of the plurality of LEDs provided on the LED substrate 181 (LEDs in the area surrounded by the broken line in FIG. 25) are LEDs for the reflector 183, and the remaining LEDs are LEDs for the inner lens 184. .
For example, as shown in FIG. 26, the reflector 183 is provided with a plurality of (in the case of the present embodiment, 11) through holes 183a, and the LED for the reflector 183 provided on the LED board 181 (the LED of the present embodiment). In this case, each of the eight LEDs corresponds to a part of the through-holes 183a (in this embodiment, eight through-holes 183a) provided in the reflector 183 in a 1: 1 relationship. Therefore, since the LED for the reflector 183 is exposed through the through hole 183 a corresponding to the LED, a part of the light from the LED for the reflector 183 directly enters the outer lens 186.

In addition, the remaining light (light that does not directly enter the outer lens 186) of the light from the LED for the reflector 183 reflects the front surface of the reflector 183 (the surface that has been subjected to the reflection processing for reflecting the light) to form the outer lens. 186.
Since the outer lens 186 is a transparent member, light from the LED for the reflector 183 incident on the outer lens 186 is transmitted through the outer lens 186 and emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154. As described above, the direct light from the LED for the reflector 183 and the indirect light (reflected light) from the reflector 183 can be emitted toward the player side by the reflector 183, so that a more effective light emission effect is performed. Can be.
Further, since the LED for the reflector 183 is exposed through the through hole 183a of the reflector 183, the LED can be visually recognized from outside the front frame light emitting unit 154 through the transparent outer lens 186.

On the other hand, the LED for the inner lens 184 provided on the LED substrate 181 is covered with an inner lens 184 (a member indicated by a broken line in FIG. 26) that can transmit light. Therefore, light from the LED for the inner lens 184 passes through the inner lens 184 and enters the outer lens 186, passes through the outer lens 186, and is emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154.
The inner lens 184 is a translucent member that can transmit light but has low transparency. Therefore, since the light is blocked by the inner lens 184, the LED for the inner lens 184 cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 through the transparent outer lens 186.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) openings are provided in the side cover 185, and each of these openings is covered with a translucent inner cover 185a. Therefore, the light transmitted through the inner lens 184 (the light from the LED for the inner lens 184) also enters the inner cover 185a, passes through the inner cover 185a, and is emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154. The inner cover 185a is a translucent member that can transmit light but has low transparency. Therefore, the inside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 cannot be visually recognized through the inner cover 185a.

<Spherical channel unit>
FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 11 as viewed from the rear side.
For example, as shown in FIG. 27, on the rear side of the outer frame 11, a firing board 240 a for controlling the hit ball firing apparatus 240, a ball flow path unit 220, a payout board (payout control apparatus 200 (see FIG. 31)), and A substrate unit 11a having a power supply substrate (power supply device 400 (see FIG. 31)) is provided.

FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the spherical flow channel unit 220.
For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the spherical channel unit 220 includes a spherical channel unit base 221, a front cover member 222 mounted on the front side of the spherical channel unit base 221, and a rear surface of the spherical channel unit base 221. And a rear lid member 223 mounted on the side. On the front side of the ball channel unit base 221, an out ball detection switch 32a (see FIG. 31) for detecting all game balls (safe ball and out ball) fired in the game area 32 and completed the game is attached. ing.

29A is a rear view (rear view) of the spherical channel unit base 221. FIG. 29B is a front view (front view) of the front cover member 222. It is a figure at the time of making transparent.
The game balls paid out from the payout unit flow into the spherical flow channel unit 220 from the inflow port 221e (see FIG. 28) provided on the rear surface side of the spherical flow channel unit base 221 and are moved to the spherical flow channel unit base 221. The air is discharged from the outlet 221c (see FIG. 28) penetrating in the front-rear direction to the outside of the spherical channel unit 220. The discharged game balls are supplied to the upper plate 21.
On the other hand, when the upper plate 21 is full, the game balls flowing into the spherical flow channel unit 220 from the inflow port 221e are discharged ball flow provided between the spherical flow channel unit base 221 and the rear cover member 223. The gas flows down the path and is discharged out of the spherical channel unit 220. The discharged game balls are supplied to the lower plate 23. For example, as shown in FIG. 29A, on the rear surface of the spherical flow path unit base 221, a payout ball flow path forming rib 221a that forms the payout spherical flow path is provided in a protruding manner. An overflow sensor 221b is disposed downstream of the payout ball flow path to detect that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (filled) in the lower plate 23. The overflow sensor 221b is, for example, a pressure sensor that detects a pressure from a game ball, and is attached to a rear surface side of the ball channel unit base 221 as shown in, for example, FIG. Note that the arrow in FIG. 29A is an arrow indicating the flowing direction of the game balls paid out from the payout unit (that is, the direction in which the game balls are guided by the payout ball flow path).

All game balls (safe balls and out balls) which have been fired into the game area 32 and have finished the game flow from a ball receiving port 221d (see FIG. 28) provided on the front side of the ball channel unit base 221 to the ball channel unit. The fluid flows into the inside 220, flows down the out-sphere channel provided between the spherical channel unit base 221 and the front cover member 222, and is discharged out of the spherical channel unit 220. The discharged gaming balls are discharged from the gaming machine 10 to the island facility side. For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), an out-sphere flow path forming rib 222a that forms the out-sphere flow path is provided on the rear surface of the front cover member 222 so as to protrude.
An out ball detection switch 32a is arranged in the middle of the out ball flow path, and the out ball detection switch 32a is configured to detect game balls passing through the out ball flow path one by one. . The arrow in FIG. 29B indicates the downflow direction of all game balls (safe ball and out ball) that have been fired into the game area 32 and completed the game (that is, the direction in which the game ball is guided by the out ball flow path). It is an arrow that shows.

  The out ball detection switch 32a is not a sensor that detects all game balls (safe ball and out ball) that have been fired into the game region 32 and have completed the game, but an out ball (out port 30a provided in the game region 32). (See FIG. 30). That is, the safe ball (the game ball that has won the winning area) may not flow into the ball receiving port 221d of the ball channel unit 220, and only the out ball may flow.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 30, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 80 serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30 on the front surface of the game board main body 80. Game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a hit ball firing device 240 into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At a substantially center of the game area 32, a center case 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind a window formed in the center case 40.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and a CRT (CRT). A still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image in an area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area). For example, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) Information about the game, such as a background image that enhances the effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and game balls that have passed through the warp flow path are rolled. A possible stage section 620 is provided. Since the stage section 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36, the game balls rolled on the stage section 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
In addition, a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating is provided on an upper portion of the center case 40. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 30 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the general-purpose starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided. When a game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, a general-purpose variation display game is executed.

  Two general prize holes 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general prize hole 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by a winning opening switch 35a provided in the general winning opening 35 (see FIG. 31).

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning port 36 (first start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 31).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 31).
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member maintains a closed state (a disadvantageous state for a player) in which a game ball cannot normally flow. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the general state solenoid 37c (see FIG. 31) as a driving device is used to open the game ball into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (game). Condition that is advantageous to the person).

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a so-called Vero type normal electric accessory which opens and closes by moving forward and backward (sliding) by the general-purpose solenoid 37c. 37 movable members are not limited to this. The movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory which is opened by being rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by a general-purpose solenoid 37c, or may be a general-purpose solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-type ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of an inverted “C”.
In addition, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may enable a game ball to win even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state where the game ball is less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the ordinary figure starting gate 34 and the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37, a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper winning port) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper winning prize port into a state in which game balls can flow in by opening and closing members (not shown) advance and retreat (slide) in the front-rear direction. The first special fluctuation winning device 38 changes the upper winning hole from a closed state to an open state based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the upper winning hole. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 31).

  A special area into which a game ball can flow is provided in the upper winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 31) is provided so as to change the probability of the game ball flowing into the specific area. ) Is provided. The specific area is provided with a specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 31) capable of detecting the inflow of the game ball, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous to the player is established. (In the present embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special fluctuation winning device 38.

  In addition, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 31) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area is provided inside the upper winning a prize port. ing. The number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided inside the upper winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper winning opening) and the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharging switch 38e are detected. The number of game balls (the number of game balls ejected from the upper winning prize port) matches, and it can be confirmed that all game balls in the upper prize winning port have been ejected. Basically, until this check is completed Will not open a new Kamikaze winning opening.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, to the right of the starting winning opening 36, a second special variable winning which can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure varying display game. A device (lower prize winning port) 39 is provided. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts a lower winning prize port into a state in which game balls can flow in by opening and closing (not shown) advancing and retracting (sliding) in the front-rear direction. The second special fluctuation winning device 39 changes the lower special winning opening from the closed state to the open state based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the lower special winning opening. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player. A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 31).

  The game area 32 below the start winning port 36 is provided with an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like. In addition, the special figure change display game (the special figure 1 change display game, the special figure 2 change display game) and the normal figure change display game are executed outside the game area 32 and at the lower right corner of the game board main body 80. A batch display device 50 is provided.

  The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure change display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 change display for a special figure 1 change display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure change display section) 52 for the game, a first storage display section 53 for notifying the number of start storage of the special figure 1 change display game constituted by an LED lamp, and an LED lamp And a second storage display unit 54 for informing the number of start storages of the special figure 2 variable display game.

The collective display device 50 has a round display portion 55 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed). A first game state display unit 56 for informing how to hit (how to hit corresponding to the game state), and a probability display unit 57 for informing the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure change display game are provided. I have. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display section for displaying that the large hit probability state is in the high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a display for turning on when a large hit occurs to notify the large hit occurrence. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, a general-figure display section 58 for displaying the general-figure variation display game, a storage display section 59 for notifying the number of stored start-ups of the general-figure variation display game, A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

  The special figure variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variable display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variable display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blink cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also driven to blink in addition to the center segment. It is configured to display that it is fluctuating, and to be able to distinguish between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. When the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment (the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the missing, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the loss result mode as a hit result mode (special result mode).

The first memory display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs from the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = reserved number) among the winning prize balls to the starting winning port 36 which is a change start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. , Is displayed by lighting (flashing).
The second storage and display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = reserved number) among the winning ball numbers to the normal fluctuation prize device 37 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52 by a plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off and lighting (flashing).
The round display unit 55 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn on the light. The round display section 55 may be constituted by a 7-segment display.

The first game state display unit 56 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (at the time of normal beating), all LEDs are turned off, and In the case of a game state in which right-handing is more advantageous to the player than hitting (right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probable state). In the case of, all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. Oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from a 32 V DC voltage. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. A control signal generator 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information on the game even if a power failure occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and can resume the game based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. Of game information storage and holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariably information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, and the like) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a fluctuation pattern table for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for determining the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory by the CPU 111A. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output the game machines. 10 is controlled overall. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generation circuit for generating random numbers for determining a variation pattern for determining reach and non-reach variable display, including a running time of a variable display game, and a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game. And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock for giving an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, in the process related to the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of start storages. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, A winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, a large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, a large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and a gate switch in the general figure starting gate 34. 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e disposed in the first special variable winning device 38, and all game balls (safe balls and out balls) fired in the game area 32 and completed the game. It is connected to an out-sphere detection switch 32a for detecting, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches. There are input, interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts the positive logic signal 0V-5V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that a lead wire of a sensor or a proximity switch is incorrectly short-circuited, a sensor or a switch is disconnected from a connector, or a lead wire is cut to be floating. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the special winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. Is done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

  The third input port 124 includes a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibration of the gaming machine 10, a gaming machine, A detection signal of a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become.

  Further, a signal from a setting key switch 152 for detecting an operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured to be able to turn the setting key from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that the switch has been turned to the second position. The switch is turned on when the switch is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

  The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value of a special result in the special figure change display game is assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure change display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. I have. Here, six “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared as probability setting values.

  When selecting the probability set value, the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated (pressed) while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position. Is changed to a probability set value change mode in which the probability initialization value can be changed by operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability set value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the information on the probability set value while the operation on the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode). In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

By turning on the power of the gaming machine in a state where the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is displayed on the performance display device. A probability set value confirmation mode is displayed in 153 but the probability set value cannot be changed. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the probability setting values by numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and may be any display mode that can recognize the probability set value. Further, the display device may be another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, or may indicate the probability setting value by the lighting mode or emission color of one or more LEDs.

  Also, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are transmitted from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) through the apparatus. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). A signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), an abnormal payout status signal (a status signal indicating abnormal payout), a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the input signal and supplying the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the trial test apparatus as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. I have. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is provided with a first special winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large for opening the second special variable winning device 39). The operation data of the winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and the general electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output and currently selected. This port is for outputting display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the probability set value.
The output unit 130 further includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output section 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device that is output from the third output port 135, and is output from a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the data, and the display data of the performance display device 153 that is output from the second output port 134. Fifth driver 138e is provided for receiving a data signal to generate a drive signal output. Note that data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

32 V DC is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138 a in order to drive a solenoid operated at 32 V. In order to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5 V, the fifth driver 138 e is supplied with 5 V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage.
In addition, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The dynamic driving method is achieved by applying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in the above, and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are provided. Absent.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switches 38a and 39a, the gate A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) for detecting a game ball by using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used as the switch 34a. Have been. The glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 and the like include micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decoration lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 includes a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. In addition, even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for controlling the drive of the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the input of a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the function of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting a state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  FIG. 33 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won. The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device (first special result), and the small hit is a special result without the operation of the condition device (second special result). The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

The value (probability value) of the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, and the probability value in the low-probability state and the probability value in the high-probability state are respectively The probability values are as shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, the same probability value is assigned to all of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” as the probability values in the high probability state, but different probability values are set. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, the same probability value is assigned to “setting 1” and “setting 2” as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, and “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, as long as the probability value in the low probability state can be switched in multiple stages, the number of stages is not limited. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” as the probability values in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be able to be switched in multiple stages.

In addition, the effect distribution and the like may be different between “setting 1” and “setting 2” having the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, and “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, six probability setting values (“setting 1”) for three types of probability values (the probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state). To “Setting 6”), for example, three probability setting values (for example, “Setting 1” to “Setting 3”) are assigned to three types of probability values, and the remaining three probability setting values (for example, “Setting 4” to “Setting 6”) may not be used.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in a special game state based on a big hit (first special game state), a game ball flows into a specific area (probable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by a specific area switch 38d. (V passing), the special game state is set to a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and a low probability state is set when a falling lottery performed every time the special figure variable display game is executed is won. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG.
Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. The small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and the small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit do not win twice. In the present embodiment, the small hit is provided only in the special figure 2 without being provided in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but is not limited thereto. May be provided in both the special figures 1 and 2. In addition, when the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be smaller in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. May be higher, and the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

FIG. 33 (d) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, and the distribution probabilities of each type of jackpot.
There are three types of big hits (first special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game: 10R certain big hits, 4R certain big hits, and 10R normal big hits. Similarly, there are three types of big hits (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R certain big hits, 4R certain big hits, and 10R normal big hits. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that a game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability operation area) and is likely to be in a high probability state (probability state) after the end of the special game state. The normal state indicates that it is unlikely that a game ball will flow into a specific area (probable change operation area) and is unlikely to be in a high probability state (probable change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds refers to the number of rounds for performing opening control such that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The number of each big hit type is the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of actual rounds + the number of rounds for performing opening control such that the opening time of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is short and no winning ball is actually generated). May be.

Further, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area is lower than the probability changing big hit, but the possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area than the normal big hit is higher.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is established is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into a specific area (probable change operation area). If the game ball does not flow into the area, the state does not enter the high probability state. Even if the type of the big hit is normal, the state enters the high probability state when the game ball flows into the specific area.

FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) show the opening modes in each round for each big hit type. FIG. 35 shows details of the opening mode.
As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the 10R probability change jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round and a long opening with a V that opens a specific region (probability change operation region) is performed. The long opening with V is an opening mode in which a game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probable change operation area). Then, in the second and subsequent rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the 4R probability change jackpot, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a long opening with a V that opens a specific region (probability change operation region) is performed. From the second round to the fourth round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened but the specific region is not released, and the first special variable prize device 38 is released from the fifth round onward. A specific area is short-circuited without V-open. The short opening without V is an opening mode in which the possibility that a game ball flows into the special winning opening is lower than the long opening without V. In other words, the long opening without V is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning ball is actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the 10R normal big hit, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a short-circuit opening with a V that opens a specific area (probable operation area) is performed. The short opening with V is an opening mode in which there is a possibility that a game ball may flow into a specific area (probable operation area) and the opening is lower than the long opening. Then, in the second and subsequent rounds, a long opening without V for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.
Only the V-long open and the V-short open performed in the first round are allowed to allow the game ball to flow into the specific area (probable change operation area). That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is a round in which gaming balls may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. The specific round may be a plurality of times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the long open without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t11) and the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) If any of the conditions of ()) is established, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t12). Thereafter, the upper winning prize opening ball processing time starts (t12), and when the upper prize winning opening ball processing time ends, the interval time starts (t13), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). ). In the case of the last round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, in the long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, at the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area and the game ball cannot flow. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can flow. Becomes The state in which the specific area switch 38d is valid is a state in which detection of a game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as invalid.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 msec has elapsed since the lever solenoid 38f was turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that a game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened flows into the specific area.

  When 200 msec has elapsed from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, after the lapse of 2700 msec, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and either the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. When the condition is satisfied, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). Thereafter, the upper winning prize opening ball processing time starts (t39), and when the upper prize winning opening ball processing time ends, the interval time starts (t41). When the interval time ends, the next round starts (t42). . In the case of the last round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  After the second opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the specific area switch 38d is also enabled (t36). The second opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, so that the game ball almost certainly flows into the specific area. Become. Therefore, when the type of the big hit is certain, the high probability state is almost certainly attained.

  Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 immediately before closing. It is possible for the game balls to flow into a specific area. Note that the first special variable prize device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable prize device 38 are processed into the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41), the operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the elapse of the openable time or the predetermined number of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed into the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing time. If the discharge is not completed within the range, and the discharge is completed before the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge is completed. Is ended, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the elapse of the openable time or the predetermined number of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed into the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing time. If not completely discharged by the end of the period during which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) With this, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is completed. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid after 100 ms has passed since the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43) (t44).

  As shown in FIG. 35 (c), in the short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening ends. The round is ended based on (t54). Since the opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, the possibility that a game ball flows into a specific area is low. Therefore, when the big hit type is normal, it is rare to be in a high probability state.

  The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching of the specific area switch 38d between valid and invalid perform the same operation as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if game balls remain in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the upper winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing time elapses, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining balls is completed. And the operation ends, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls have not been ejected by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62). The state ends, the operation ends, and after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62), 100 m seconds later, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

  Also, the first special fluctuation in the first special fluctuation prize winning device 38 in the long opening with V shown in FIG. 35 (b) (t31 to t34) and the first special fluctuation in the short opening with V shown in FIG. 35 (c). The opening of the prize winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an opening time that allows the first special variable prize winning device 38 to win at least one game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (d), in the short opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t71), and the opening time of 200 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) If any of the conditions of ()) is established, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of winnings, which are the closing conditions, occur. In most cases, the prize is closed as the openable time elapses. Thereafter, the upper winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing time starts (t72), and when the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing time ends, the interval time starts (t73), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t74). ). In the case of the last round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  FIG. 34D shows an open state in the second special game state (the special game state based on the small hit). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time starts, and when the small hit fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and the openable time of 1600 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, When any one of the nine game balls wins, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed. Thereafter, the small hit remaining ball processing time starts, and when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts. When the small hit ending time ends, the second special game state ends. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of opening and closing modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the second special game state. .

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, transition (transition) of a game state by game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 36 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first specific game state ST2, and a second specific game state ST3. In addition, other special game states include a first special game state based on a first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on a second special result (small hit), but are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, an effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, The main starting area, which is the starting area to be targeted, the main fluctuation special figure, which is the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are determined.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by left-handing and to aim for a prize in the ordinary variable prize-winning device 37 by right-handing. That is, it is possible to select a starting area to be aimed at by a player's intention. In addition, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that the game progresses mainly in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. In order to progress, it is configured such that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one special figure variable display game that is determined to be the main in the design. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each game state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

  The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low, and there is no Toden support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no special figure fluctuation display game or general figure. This is a state where there is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be the irregular change. In the normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the small hit in the normal gaming state ST1. .

  The second specific game state ST3 is a state in which the special figure probability is basically low. However, when a game ball flows into a specific area (probable change operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (when there is V passing), the state is in a high probability state. In addition, there is a general-purpose support for improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a public figure support, there is also a reduction in the time required to reduce the change time of the special figure change display game or the normal figure change display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a chance mode. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the main starting area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 1 variable display game is to be the irregular change.

  In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general-purpose support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game It is in a state where there is a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the time. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the main starting area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 1 variable display game is to be the irregular change.

In the present embodiment, the probability (the normal probability) of the hit result of the general-figure variation display game in the state with the general-purpose support is the same probability (normal probability) as the state without the general-purpose support. However, in the state where the public telephone support is provided, it is possible to set the public figure probability to be a higher probability (the normal figure high probability state) than the normal probability (the normal figure low probability state).
In the present embodiment, the state in which there is no ordinary power support means that the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is shorter than the state in which there is ordinary electric support. is there.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and the right-hand operation is performed to perform the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at. In the special figure 2 variable display game, the probability of a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of the present embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won more than the big hit. Due to the high probability of small hits, small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
If the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state in which the general power support is provided continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit, a state in which there is no ordinary power support even in a special game state based on the small hit continues. In the special game state based on the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 34D).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-hitting game balls have a normal variable winning. It wins the device 37 and does not flow down to the second special variable winning device 39 disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur frequently, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-hitting game balls have a normal variable winning. Without flowing to the device 37, it flows down to the second special variable prize device 39 disposed below the normal variable prize device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the number of game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific gaming state ST2, the small hit occurs frequently and the player's possession ball increases, so that the effect mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

  Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because there is a normal power support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state, and moreover, the state in which the number of balls held by the player increases due to frequent small hits. This is an advantageous state.

The transition of the gaming state is performed by ending the first special gaming state based on the derivation of the first special result, exhausting the specified number of games, and winning the falling lottery that is the transition lottery to the low probability state. . Basically, the probability change jackpot is derived to enter the first special game state, and in the first special game state, a game ball flows into a specific area (probable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and the specific area switch. If it is detected at 38d (there is V passing), after the end of the first special game state, the process shifts to the first specific game state ST2. On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot is derived and enters the first special game state, and when the game ball does not flow into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage) ), The game shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the end of the first special game state. In addition, a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special game state, and if there is no V passing in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special low probability It shifts to the 2nd specific game state ST3). On the other hand, a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special game state, and in the case of V passing in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability) It shifts to the 2nd specific game state ST3).
In the second specific game state ST3, when the special figure change display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, when the player has won the falling lottery in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. In addition, when there is no distinction between the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When a big hit (first special result) and a small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when there is no distinction between the first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit and the second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply referred to as a special game state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the hit ball launching device 240 toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of directional change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35. The player wins the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the gaming region 32 to play the gaming region. 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of the winning hole won. Is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31).

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the starting winning port 36 or the left side of the starting winning port 36 is set. The player can aim for a prize in the arranged general prize port 35, and fires a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed) so that a general-purpose starting gate 34, a normal fluctuation prize device 37, a first special fluctuation prize. The device 38, the second special fluctuation winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special fluctuation winning device 39 can be aimed at winning.

  A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided in the general-purpose starting gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the usual start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, the general figure starting memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four If it is less than ()), the number of ordinary figure start storages is added (+1) and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The stored number of the general-purpose starting prize is displayed on the general-purpose reserve display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (hit random value) for determining the result of the general-figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the general-figure start memory. Is to be done.

  Then, when there is a general-figure start memory and the general-figure fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the general-figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the general-figure fluctuation display game hits, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the random number for hit determination stored in the first map stored in the first place and the determination value stored in the ROM 111B are compared with each other to determine a hit in the first game. Then, a process of starting the normal figure change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the general-figure variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result mode (general-figure specific result) is derived.

  In addition, the game control device 100 sets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined change time on the general-purpose display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general-purpose change display game. After performing the display during the change in the general figure repeatedly displayed in the order given, a process of displaying the general figure change display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. Note that the general-purpose display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, a number, a symbol, a character pattern, or the like is used as the normal identification information, and after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may comprise.

  When the result of the general-floating display game is a hit, the lighting pattern serving as a special result mode is stopped and displayed on the general-figure display unit 58, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member of the normal-variation winning device 37. Control for opening for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In the case where the result of the general-figure change display game is out of control, control is performed on the general-figure display unit 58 to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the out-of-position.

  The winning ball in the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting port 1 switch 36a and a starting port 2 switch 37a respectively provided therein. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the start winning port 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). At the same time, the second start memory, which is the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the ordinary variable prize device 37, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as the starting storage information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The number of the start memories is determined by the first storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) and the second storage display unit 54 (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50. Are displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decoration special figure start storage display.

  The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display apparatus) based on the first start memory, and performs the special figure 2 display 52 ( The special figure 2 variable display game is performed by the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but during execution of one special figure variable display game, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In this case, the one special figure change display game is ended as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, during the execution of the one special figure change display game, if the other special figure change display game has the second special result (small hit), the one special figure change display game will continue until the end of the special game state based on the small hit. The special figure change display game is interrupted.

  That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 change display game (first special figure change display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). It forms a first execution control means for performing control. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 performs the special figure 2 variable display game (the second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (the second starting winning area). A second execution control means for performing the execution control is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the fluctuation display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. Jackpot and a first special game state (so-called big hit state). When the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit, a special result mode (small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. Becomes a small hit and a second special game state (so-called small hit state). In other words, the special figure 1 display 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening 36. In addition, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

  In addition, after the big hitting game state (first special game state) is over, the game control device (game control means) 100 sets a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the hit probability is high, It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with the support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms a specific game state generation means.

  In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, a decorative special figure change in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numerals, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed on the display device 41. The display game is executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. And these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the fluctuation display is performed in accordance with the fluctuation of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game.

  That is, the display variation display game (variable display game) in which the display device 41 variably displays the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). (A decoration special figure variation display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. In addition, the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit (the special figure 1 variable display game has a small hit probability of 0), but the special figure 2 variable display game has FIG. 2 A long variation (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game. As a result, in the normal game state, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game is temporally inefficient, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at small win in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a special figure 1 variable display game by aiming at the starting winning opening 36 by performing a left-hand shot.
The time for the long fluctuation is about 10 minutes, but may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of the long fluctuation may be varied according to the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss or a small hit, a long change of about 10 minutes is selected as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game, If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a long change of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, first, a process for inhibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the value of the register or the like is saved at the start address of the area. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and an upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step X4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting a power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can be prevented from dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is Wait until is shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. If the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the set number of checks. If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON. If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this manner, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at the time of turning on the power. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the load on control can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step X10). X11), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where no output is provided) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used in the present embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13). A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator provides a frequency dividing circuit for dividing the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the assumption that the RAM has an abnormality regardless of whether or not the RAM has an abnormality.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16). If it is normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM is performed. It is determined whether the value of the area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed. (Step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

  If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), It is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on based on the state read in X6 (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), the main control unit 100 issues a main abnormality error notification command to notify that the game control device 100 is abnormal because the RAM has an abnormality. (Step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting change flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting change flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the power failure occurred. That is, if the power of the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, so that the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (Step X25). As a result, a display as shown in FIG. After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of signals other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), a probability setting change flag is set (step X29). This causes a transition to the probability set value change mode. After that, the command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, operates the panel effect device 44, and operates the speakers 19a and 19b based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting. Is output to output a sound indicating that the probability set value is being changed.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), a process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. Thereafter, the processing of steps X29 and X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

  If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting change flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). N), whether the setting key switch 152 is on is determined based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N), that is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step X41 to stop the power failure. Perform the process when normal recovery is performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make means of conversion.

  If the setting key switch 152 is ON (step X35; Y), the flag for checking the probability setting is set (step X36). This causes a transition to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, the command for confirming the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X37). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the command during the probability setting confirmation, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, the operation of the panel effect device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b. The notification that the probability set value is being confirmed is output by outputting a voice or the like.

  Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process of the timer interrupt process (step X122) when the mode is the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. It is output in the processing (step X120). Therefore, when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 ms, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 ms, the security signal is output for 128 ms after the mode is switched to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. You. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to a value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output a security signal for at least 50 ms after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save a value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, an interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). In step X33, instead of making a determination based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), the state (current state) read in the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 39) is set. Judgment based on When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the OFF state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34). If no power failure has occurred (step X34; N), the process proceeds to step X33. Returning to the case where a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. If it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 37 and 38) after the recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting the interruption (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms) from the process of permitting the interrupt (step X32) to the process of disabling the interrupt (steps X38 and X55). . In the timer interrupt process, a probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability setting value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a notification end command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command, the notification being executed (the notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed or the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed) is ended. .

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting change flag is set (step X40). If the probability setting change flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting check flag is set. Performs a power failure recovery process (step X41) for performing a process of saving an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in a region to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection region, a checksum region, and a region related to error monitoring). The probability setting checking flag is cleared in step X41.
Thereafter, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a screen designation command. Send a command. As the screen designation command, if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the customer is waiting, that is, neither during execution of the special figure change display game nor during the special game state. A command for the customer waiting demo screen is transmitted, otherwise, a command for the recovery screen is transmitted. In addition, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability count information command or the like is also transmitted.

  On the other hand, if the probability setting change flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1-byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for the performance display (display of the base value and the ratio of the accessory) (the work area and the stack area) are cleared. Instead, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to zero. Therefore, the probability setting change flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44, the stack area and the unused area need not be cleared.

  Then, an initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, a RAM initialization command (customer wait) A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command, a support number information command which is information on the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game with ordinary power support, and the like are transmitted.

  Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of transposing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to make any setting.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, a random number for determining a hit symbol of a special figure) RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), a random number for determining the hit of the ordinary figure (hit random number), and a random number for determining whether or not to win the falling lottery (falling random number). After saving in a predetermined area (step X48), an interrupt is permitted (step X49). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling random number are generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are processed by the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output (the CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” in which a start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. "Has been adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol, there is only one type of hit symbol of the ordinary symbol. May be selected from a plurality of types.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step X50, a process for inhibiting interruption (step X51) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54). If no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number updating process is performed. Return to (Step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number updating process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition, the initial value random number updating process in step X50 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid the execution of the random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt, as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed during the timer interrupt processing, but only within the main processing, there is no problem if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing, thereby simplifying the main processing. There is an advantage that it is made.

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off (step X59) and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X60), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means, when the power is turned on, delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (the game control device) 100) and power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.
The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an operation of the initialization operation unit. And the initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C on the basis of the operation state of the initialization means.
In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, the interrupt routine is started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 39 is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) are performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y), Then, a probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are set based on the output data set in various processes. An output process (step X105) for performing drive control and the like of actuators such as the lever solenoid 38f and the ordinary solenoid 37c). When a signal for stopping the firing is output in step X5 of the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing the output process, and the firing permitting signal is set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X106) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step X107), and a random number update process 2 (step X108) are performed. Thereafter, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a and 39a, monitor whether there is a normal signal input, setting the prize ball, front frame and glass. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring errors such as opening of the frame and improper winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). The abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharging port switch 38e) in the first special variable winning device 38 is This is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a). When abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding.

  On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), a start-up switch monitoring process (step X111) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (eg, a big hit random number) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. Then, the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and the processing related to the general figure variable display game are performed. A segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for performing a general-purpose game process (step X114) to drive a segment LED for displaying a special figure variable display game and displaying various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. An editing process (step X115) is performed.

  Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (step X116), and a process for checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Fraudulent monitoring process (step X117), which checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is any abnormality (step X118), and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119). Further, an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (step X120) and a performance display monitor control process for controlling the performance display monitor 153 (step X121) are performed, and the timer interrupt process ends. I do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change / confirmation processing]
FIG. 40 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this probability setting change / confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the region for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (the range of 0 to 5 in the present embodiment) (step X131).
If the value of the region for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y), the probability setting corresponding to the value of the region for the probability setting value in the RWM (current probability setting value) The value display data is set (step X132), and the probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 performs the display as shown in FIGS.
On the other hand, if the value of the region for the probability set value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131; N), turn-off data is set as the probability set value display data (step X133), and the probability set value display is performed. The data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (Step X134). As a result, a display as shown in FIG. 41 (g) is performed on the performance display device 153.

As shown in FIG. 41, the performance display device 153 includes four 7-segment displays (seven-segment display) arranged side by side. During the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, of the four 7-segment displays, the rightmost 7-segment display shows the current probability set value, and the remaining 7-segment display shows “SET”. "".
Specifically, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “0”, the current probability setting value is “setting 1”, and therefore, as shown in FIG. When “1” is displayed on the segment display and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “1”, the current probability setting value is “setting 2”. As shown, “2” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display, and if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “2”, the current probability setting value is “Setting 3”. As shown in FIG. 41 (c), “3” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display, and when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “3”, the current probability setting value is “set”. 41 "," 4 "is displayed on the right-most 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41D, and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is" 4 ". In the case of, since the current probability setting value is “setting 5”, “5” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41 (e), and the probability setting value area in the RWM is displayed. Is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so "6" is displayed on the right-most 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41 (f). When the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is outside the normal range (abnormal value), the right-most 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 41 (g).
For example, if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “0”, the probability setting value display data is “1” in the first digit, “T” in the second digit, and “T” in the third digit. Probability set value display data instructing to display “E” and “S” in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step X135). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”.
Next, on data of the security signal is output and off data of signals other than the security signal is output (step X136). In step X136, security data ON data is output regardless of whether the security signal control timer has expired. Therefore, the security signal is continuously output during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirmation flag is set).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability setting change flag is set (step X137). If the probability setting change flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, if the probability setting check flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting change flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process being executed is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

  If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139). In step X139, when an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected in the immediately preceding input process (step X103), it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y), that is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is set to 0 to 0. +1 is updated in the range of 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. The value updated in step X140 (the updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set for three types of probability values (a probability value in a low probability state and a probability value in a high probability state). However, for example, “setting 1” to “setting 3” may be assigned to three types of probability values (a probability value in a low probability state and a probability value in a high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the region for the probability set value of the RWM is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change mode, and to operate the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability set value change mode. The probability set value can be changed with.
Since only the pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is possible, it is not possible to distinguish between a shift operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) is continued even during the probability setting value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch When the button 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

  Specifically, in the input process of the timer interrupt process (step X103), the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is off, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is turned off. When the state is the ON state, an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned on is the current input process. The state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the process is likely to be in the off state. That is, if the transition operation is continued even in the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected. Therefore, in this case, if the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the shift operation, and The inconvenience that the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM is updated may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the processing of step X138 is performed, and the processing of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on. It shall be. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability set value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has been continued since the power was turned on (that is, the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability set value change mode). ), The input signal (rising edge) based on the operation (2) is ignored, so that unintended updating can be prevented.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (the special figure variation display game) is a special result. An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and storage means for storing one probability setting value among a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values to be used for a game lottery are assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM 111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability set value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In response to an operation of the second operation unit during the probability set value change mode, the transition means (the game control device 100) and the probability set value (the value of the probability set value area in the RWM) stored in the storage means. Change) Setting change means (game control device 100), an operation (transfer operation) of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability set value change mode, and an operation of the second operation unit for changing the probability set value (Change operation) is the same operation (press operation in the case of the present embodiment), and the setting change means continues even after the power of the gaming machine is turned on even during the probability set value change mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the two operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on is continued even after the transition to the probability set value change mode, the probability set value is not changed during that time, so that it is not intended. It is possible to prevent a change in the probability set value.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 42 shows the start-up switch monitoring process (step X111) in the above-described timer interrupt process. In this starting port switch monitoring process, first, a starting port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process (step X492) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information set when the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number obtaining process (step X493).

If the information on the presence of the start opening winning is not set based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. Note that, in this case, the information on no start-up winning is set.
On the other hand, if the information on the presence of the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (normal game state). (Step X494). Then, when the special figure low probability and no time saving are being performed (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the special figure low probability and the time saving are not in progress (step X494; N), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and the effect command setting processing (step X496) is performed.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the right-turn instruction notification command, the right-turn instruction is instructed to instruct the player to make a right-turn by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in a specific game state or a special game state, right-handed is more advantageous to the player, and the player does not win unless left-handed. When a win is detected, a right-handed instruction is notified.

  Then, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure starting port switch common processing (step X498) is performed. Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step X499), and a hard random number obtaining process (step X500) is performed to obtain a big hit random number based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37. It is determined whether there is a start-up winning information that is set in the case (step X501).

If the winning entry winning information has not been set based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process ends. Note that, in this case, the information on no start-up winning is set.
On the other hand, if the start-up winning information is set based on the winning in the ordinary variable prize device 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether the pudden (the ordinary variable prize device 37) is operating, that is, It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step X502). If the normal power is operating (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X504. Transition. On the other hand, if the ordinary telephone is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal unauthorized transmission is occurring (step X503).

  In the determination as to whether or not the irregular fraud has occurred, it is determined that the fraud has occurred when the number of illegal winnings in the ordinary variable prize device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and a game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the counted number of illegal winnings is equal to or more than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud is occurring.

  In the case where the illegal use of the ordinary telephone is occurring (step X503; Y), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more. In addition, in the case where the illegal operation of the ordinary telephone is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the holding by the starting port 2 is prepared (step X504), and the common processing of the special figure starting port switch (step X505) is performed. Then, the start-up switch monitoring process ends.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure starting port switch common processing (steps X498 and X505) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing. The special drawing starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

In the special process starting port switch common processing, first, among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, information on the number of winnings to the monitored starting port switch is transmitted to the management device external to the gaming machine 10. The starting port signal output count, which is the number of times the output is performed, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal output count area (step X524), and the special figure hold (start) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is started. It is determined whether the number of stored), that is, the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is looped to 0 by updating +1 and the value after the update is not saved.

  Then, if the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step X525; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended. On the other hand, if the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target opening port winning flag is saved (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step X528), and the big random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the big random number storage area of the RWM. (Step X529).

Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, a falling lottery random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and saved in a falling lottery random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) has been won (step X534). If it is not winning (starting X2; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, when the winning is to the starting opening 2 (step X534; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535) and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). .

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538), which is a pre-read process, is performed. Next, a start-up switch to be monitored and a decoration special-drawing hold number command corresponding to the special-drawing hold number are prepared (step X539), and an effect command setting process (step X540) is performed. finish.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning port 36, and stores the predetermined random number as a first starting memory to a predetermined upper limit number. A start storage means is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and stores the predetermined random number as a second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. (2) A starting storage means is provided.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
FIGS. 44 and 45 show the special figure hold information determination processing (step X538) in the above-described special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  In this special figure reservation information determination processing, first, it is determined whether a big hit is being performed (during the first special game state) (step X541), and if a big hit is being performed (step X541; Y), the special figure reservation information determination is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, when the big hit is not in progress (step X541; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked to win the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36). Is determined (step X542).

  If the winning is to the opening 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform prefetching. On the other hand, when the winning is not made to the starting port 1 (step X542; N), it is determined whether the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (during the normal game state) (step X543). If the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (step X543; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. That is, when the game is in the normal gaming state, a long variation (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, the prefetch is not performed. On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (step X543; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is present (step X544).

  If it is not during the special figure high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, if the special figure high probability is in progress (step X544; Y), is the value of the drop lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure starting port switch common process within the range of the determination value of the fall winning? A determination is made (step X545). Next, a prefetch fall lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), and effect command setting processing (step X547) is performed to prepare a low probability determination flag (step X548).

  Then, a pre-reading big hit determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (big hit low probability determination value). If the result of the determination is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step X551), and prepared in step X530 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number obtained is acquired (step X552), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a jackpot (step X550; N), the starting port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting port switch common process is checked, and the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) is checked. (Step X553).

  If it is not the winning in the starting opening 2 (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the winning is to the opening 2 (step X553; Y), a small hit determination process (step X554) for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. I do. If the result of the determination is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common processing is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is obtained (step X557), and the flow proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a small hit (step X555; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557, or set in step X558. The stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step X559).

Thereafter, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X560), and effect command setting processing (step X561) is performed.
Next, a high-probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and a look-ahead big-hit determination process (step X563) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit random value matches the big-hit determination value (big-hit high-probability determination value). I do. When the result of the determination is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step X565), and the process proceeds to step X530 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step S566 is acquired (step X566), and the flow proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a jackpot (step X564; N), the starting port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting port switch common process is checked, and the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) is checked. (Step X567).

  If it is not the winning opening 2 (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the winning is to the starting opening 2 (step X567; Y), the small hit determination process (step X568) for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. I do. If the result of the determination is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is obtained (step X571), and the flow proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a small hit (step X569; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and it is determined whether the special figure high probability is present (step X573).

  If it is not during the special figure high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, when the special symbol is in the high probability state (step X573; Y), the stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571 is stored in the symbol information area where the stop symbol information is saved in step X559, or Then, the stop symbol information set in step S574 is overwritten and saved (step X574). In addition, the stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for pre-reading the variation pattern or the like.

Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start-up switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X575), and effect command setting processing (step X576) is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure suspension information determination process is performed, the result determined using the large hit low probability determination value and the result determined using the large hit high probability determination value are transmitted to the effect control device 300. Is done.
Next, special figure information setting processing (step X577) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game (step X578). I do.
Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern number indicating a variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and effect command setting processing (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure pending information. The process ends. Note that the special figure information setting processing in step X577 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step X578 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  By the above processing, the look-ahead fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target, and the look-ahead stop including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target A symbol command and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the result-related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether the vehicle falls down (whether the big hit probability state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state)) or not, whether the big hit or the small hit, or not. , The type of variation pattern) can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and is displayed on the display device 41 in particular. By changing the decoration special figure start storage display to be performed, it is possible to notify the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that can determine the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variation display game, based on the start memory stored in the start storage unit. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start storage unit before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). A pre-determination means is provided. In addition, the timing at which the random number value stored corresponding to the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning that the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Prefetch big hit determination processing]
FIG. 46 shows the prefetch big hit determination process (steps X549 and X563) in the above-described special figure suspension information determination process. In the pre-reading jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step X581), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as the determination result indicates that the lottery has been lost.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (Step X582; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (Step X583). If the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), an upper limit judgment value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is set to the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, if the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, if it is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, when the big hit is not a big hit, an outlier is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing ends.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 1 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 interruption flag that is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). The special figure 1 variable display game is executed when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second special game state is executed. , During the execution of the second special game state.

  If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101 and the subsequent special figure 1 variable display is performed. Performs processing related to the game. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. No, the process moves to step Y116. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display is continued.

  In the process related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, a special game state executed based on whether the special figure 2 is in a big hit / small hit, that is, based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit It is determined whether it is in the middle (step Y101). When the big hit / small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit / small hit in the special map 2 (step Y101; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) and a specific area switch monitoring process (step Y103) are performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of a game ball with the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is performed. In order to set a special winning opening count command to be monitored and transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on winning in the special winning opening, or to close the special winning opening when a specified number of winnings have been made in the special winning opening. Is performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special winning state switch monitoring processing is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit. For a special game state executed based on a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in a special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the identification is performed based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). A process for setting an area passage flag is performed. Processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the setting of the specific area passage flag.

  Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the processing branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. A special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in a register (step Y106). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is obtained (step Y107), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y108).

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “0” in step Y108, the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the special setting are performed. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y109) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during fluctuation is performed.
If the special figure 1 game processing number is “1” in step Y108, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display is performed. The process during one fluctuation (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the type of each big hit The special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “3” in step Y108, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. The processing of the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y112) is performed.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “5” in step Y108, if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 1 A special winning port remaining ball process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end process is performed.
If the special figure 1 game processing number is “6” in step Y108, the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y115) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y109) I do.

  After that, a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y116), and a pattern change control process (step Y117) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed, and the lever solenoid is operated. A lever solenoid control process (step Y118) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 1 game process ends. The special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control for the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
48 and 49 show the special figure 2 game process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

  In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is in the special game state executed based on the big hit (step). Y131). Then, when the big hit of the special map 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y134. If the special hit is not in the big hit (step Y131; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and a specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of a game ball with the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is performed. In order to set a special winning opening count command to be monitored and transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on winning in the special winning opening, or to close the special winning opening when a specified number of winnings have been made in the special winning opening. Is performed. In the special figure 2 game process, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 1 game process described above.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the identification is performed based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). A process for setting an area passage flag is performed. Processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the setting of the specific area passage flag.

  Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. Is determined (step Y136).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the length is stored in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The variation timer value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y138), and the routine goes to step Y153.
In order to prevent a player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game in which the small hit occurrence probability is high in the normal game state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if an upper limit is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times that the specified time (for example, 60000 ms) is measured.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is stored in the register. It is set (step Y139). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is obtained (step Y140), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y141).

If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y141, the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the change start, the effect setting, and the special figure 2 FIG. 2 Special figure 2 usual processing (step Y142) for setting information necessary for performing the fluctuation processing is performed.
If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” at step Y141, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 2 display is performed. A process during two fluctuations (step Y143) is performed.
In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the type of each big hit type A special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

If the special figure 2 game processing number is “3” in step Y141, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing, and the like are performed. The processing to be performed during the fanfare / interval (step Y145) is performed.
In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “4”, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

If the special figure 2 game processing number is "5" in step Y141, if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 2 A special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y147) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game processing number is “6” in step Y141, the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

If the special figure 2 game processing number is "7" in step Y141, the opening time / opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hit processing are performed. A small fanfare medium process (step Y149) for setting information necessary for the operation is performed.
If the special figure 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y141, the small hitting middle processing (step Y150) for setting the ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

If the special figure 2 game processing number is “9” in step Y141, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hitting processing or the processing for ending the small hitting A small hit remaining ball process (step Y151) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game processing number is “10” in step Y141, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y153), and a pattern fluctuation control process (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid is operated. A lever solenoid control process (step Y155) for controlling the operation at 38f is performed, and the special figure 2 game process ends. The special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control for the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-described special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2. In the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processes will be described in parallel.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y109) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special map 1 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 1 can be started (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuating display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started to change, in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

If the special figure 1 cannot be changed (step Y201; N), “0” is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y <b> 217), the special map 1 ordinary processing ends. In addition, when the variation of the special figure 1 can be started (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction has been notified, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag has been set (step Y202).
If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-turn instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), an effect command setting process (step Y204) is performed, and the left-turn instruction notification flag is set. (Step Y205). The left-turn instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, so that the left-turn instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206), and if the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and effect command setting processing (step Y208) is performed. . Thereafter, a special figure 1 change start process (step Y209) for setting information related to the special figure 1 change display game is performed, and a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y210). ), And effect command setting processing (step Y211). Note that at the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. After that, a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y212), and effect command setting processing (step Y213) is performed.

  Next, the special figure status change area is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y214). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure change display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed, and the special figure status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 change display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. Thereafter, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends.

[Tokuzu 2 usual processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y142) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special map 2 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 2 can be started (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which becomes a big hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is in a state in which the fluctuation cannot be started, in this case, the special figure 2 is not in the normal processing. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), “0” is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239) Tokuzu 2 usual processing ends. In addition, when the special figure 2 can be started to change (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (step Y222).

  If the number of reserved special figure 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing (step Y224) is performed. . Thereafter, a special figure 2 change start process (step Y225) for setting information relating to the special figure 2 change display game is performed, and a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step Y226). ), And effect command setting processing (step Y227). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y226), the special figure 2 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not subtracted, and the current special figure 2 reservation is not performed. A reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. Thereafter, a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y228), and effect command setting processing (step Y229) is performed.

  Next, the state of the special figure 2 being changed is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y230). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. Thereafter, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting processing (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 ordinary processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y232). Then, if the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233). If the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y234). If not (step Y234; N), the customer waiting demo is not started. Performs processing related to state setting. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y232; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234; Y). Shifts to step Y238.

  In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y235), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236). A command setting process (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, from the receipt of this command, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It becomes possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, a change start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure change display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This allows the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

  Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed after receiving this command. Thus, it is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the gaming state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 52A shows the special figure 1 change start processing (step Y209) in the above-described special figure 1 ordinary processing. The special figure 1 change start processing is a processing performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game. In the special figure 1 change start processing, first, a special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of a change pattern in the special figure reservation information determination processing is set (step Y241). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area of RWM (for reserved number 1) (step Y242), and the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y243), a falling lottery process (Step Y244) for performing a lottery transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1).

  Next, a big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting outfall information or big hit information as result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. A symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, a special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to refer to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. A special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the above information is set, is prepared (step Y248).

  Thereafter, a special figure 1 change pattern setting process (step Y249) for setting a change pattern that is a change mode in the special figure 1 change display game is performed, and a change start information setting for setting information on a change start of the special figure 1 change display game is performed. The processing (step Y250) is performed, and the time reduction fluctuation count updating processing (step Y251) is performed. Next, "1" for the special figure 1 changing process is set as the processing number (step Y252), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step Y253).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal related to the start of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step Y256). Here, 100 ms is saved (step Y257), and the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 1 fluctuation (step Y258), and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed. To end.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 52 (b) shows the special figure 2 change start processing (step Y225) in the above-described special figure 2 ordinary processing. The special figure 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game. In this special figure 2 change start processing, first, a special figure 2 information setting flag used for distribution of a change pattern in the special figure reservation information determination processing is set (step Y261). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM (step Y262). (Step Y263), a falling lottery process (Step Y264) for performing a lottery transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest).

  Next, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting miss information, big hit information or small hit information as result information of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is set. Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step Y266) is performed. Then, a special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to refer to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the above information is set, is prepared (step Y268).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The processing (step Y270) is performed, and the time reduction fluctuation start update processing (step Y271) is performed. Next, "1" relating to the special figure 2 changing process is set as the process number (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal relating to the start of the change of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). Then, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step Y276). Here, 100 ms is saved (step Y277), and the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 2 change (step Y278), and special figure 2 change start processing is performed. To end.

  In the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing, when a change pattern of the special figure change display game is selected, information on the set probability set value may be referred to. This makes it possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies a probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value, or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 53 shows a falling lottery process (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing. In the falling lottery process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581). If the special figure high probability is not in progress (step Y581; N), the falling lottery processing is ended. If the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582). Note that to win the falling lottery means that the falling lottery random number matches the falling lottery determination value. The falling lottery determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the falling lottery random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit value of the falling lottery determination value, which is the lower limit value of the falling lottery determination value, and is the upper limit value of the falling lottery determination value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value, it is determined that the lottery has been won.

If the value of the falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the falling lottery has not been won, the falling lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (Step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (Step Y583).
If the value of the falling lottery random number is greater than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the falling lottery has not been won, the falling lottery process ends. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (Step X583; N), that is, when the falling lottery is won, processing for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, a signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON, and four big hit signals are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y586), and the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y587). Thereafter, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the falling lottery process ends. As a result, the state becomes the low probability state and the state without the ordinary power support, and the state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, the information of the end of the high probability state and the end of the general power support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on the information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 54A shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, a big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y282). Step Y283).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 as a result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y284), and if it is a big hit (step Y284; Y), the big hit flag 1 is set. The process ends. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is a big hit (step Y286; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information was saved in step Y281 (step Y285). Y287), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is not a jackpot (step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 54B shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y293). Step Y294).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. I do. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big random number value matches the big hit determination value.
If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step Y292 (step Y292). Y298), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value is equal to the jackpot determination value to determine whether the jackpot is a small jackpot. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information has been saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301), and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
FIG. 55 shows the big hit determination processing (steps Y285 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing described above. In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the player has lost the lottery of the big hit. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is present (step Y313).

  When the special figure is in the high probability (step Y313; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is set to the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the determination value (step Y316). If the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y313; N), an upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target big hit random number is determined in the upper limit determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step Y316).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when the big hit is not a big hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
FIG. 56 shows the small hit determination process (step Y299) in the above-described big hit flag 2 setting process. In the small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). Here, the small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value which is a lower limit value of the small hit determination value and equal to or less than an upper limit determination value which is an upper limit value of the small hit determination value. In some cases, a small hit is determined. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, an outlier is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery has been lost. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, when it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y324), and the small hit judgment processing is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step Y246) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331). ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this process. The reason why the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained to obtain the special figure 1 round number. It saves in the upper limit value information area (step Y338), acquires the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 large winning opening information area (step Y339), and proceeds to step Y340. . These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set. After that, an effect command setting process (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decorative special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343). One stop symbol setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step Y266) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. The special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process for the special symbol 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this process. Note that the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the upper limit information on the number of rounds corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and the number of special figure 2 rounds is obtained. It saves in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), acquires the special winning opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number, saves it in the special figure 2 large winning opening information area (step Y369), and proceeds to step Y370. . These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y376). Next, a special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y377), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y378). The small hit type is selected by this processing. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y379), and the process proceeds to step Y370.

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y380), and the loss stop symbol pattern is specified. It saves in the 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y371) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372), and the special hit 2 large hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), and the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) in the first variable display game. Is a first determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, based on the second start memory stored in the second start storage means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the second change display game (the special figure 2 change display game) in the second change display game. A second determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the start winning port 36 is provided at a position where a game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win a prize, and the normal variable prize device 37 is provided with a game ball fired on the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information on a variable time capable of specifying the execution time of the variable display game, and the second determination is performed in the normal state (normal game state). The change time that can be determined as the change time of the second variable display game by the means is longer than the change time that can be determined as the change time of the first variable display game by the first determination means. Become.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on a pattern is exemplified. By transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determining unit. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process.
Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determining unit. . In addition, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and the variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determination unit as control information. As transmission means that can be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time has elapsed the variation time. It forms a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  In the special figure 2 change display game in the normal game state, a long change is set with a very long change time. In this case, information on the change time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the long change is not performed. May be transmitted. In the case of a long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display based on the reception of the command indicating the long fluctuation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, and a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the fluctuation display based on receiving the stop command. To do. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the effect control device 300.

[Special figure 1 information setting processing]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 1 information setting processing (step Y247) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 information setting process, first, a variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are obtained (step Y402). It is determined whether the FIG. 1 big hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y403). If it is the special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

  If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reserved number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y405), and the special figure 1 information setting processing ends. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)) and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 1 change display game, in the case of a loss, the change pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number only in the first half change pattern, and in the case of a big hit, the special figure 1 hold number is considered. The variation pattern is determined.

[Special figure 2 information setting processing]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 2 information setting processing (step Y267) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. In the special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether the special figure is low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (step Y421). If the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not it is the time fluctuation final variation (step Y427). Here, if the special figure 2 change display game to be started is the 100th (support count) special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time reduction final change is to be performed.

  If it is the time-reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), the process proceeds to step Y428. If the time variation is not the final variation (step Y427; N), a variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424), and proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the high probability final fluctuation (step Y427). In this case, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 change display game to be started is won, it is determined that the change is the high probability final change.
If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), the first-half offset data and the second-half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and the process proceeds to step Y425.
If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y429; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 at low probability is set (step Y430), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. Is set (Step Y432), and the routine goes to Step Y425.

  If it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length change is set. (Step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.

Thereafter, the latter half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y426), and the special figure 2 information setting processing is ended. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)) and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 change display game, the change pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 2 reservations.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y249) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, a fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), and an address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y452). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) in FIG. 1 to prepare (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out, that is, the stop symbol pattern is a non-stop symbol pattern (step Y454). )I do. If the special figure 1 is not out of position (step Y454; N), a distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half change group table is different between the hit and non-hit types. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for hitting is 2 byte size. The rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of losing, and even one byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving data capacity, the size of the hit is 1 byte. Therefore, at the time of hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of misses is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and the size of the misses is 2 bytes in order to enable more diverse effects.

  Then, the address of the second-half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of Toku-zu 1 (Step Y458). Next, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, the second-half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is obtained and saved in the second-half variation number area (step Y460). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second variation number (step Y462). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of FIG. Prepare (step Y464).
After that, a distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained and saved in the first variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process ends. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 62 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y269) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, a fluctuation group address table is set (step Y471), and an address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y472). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) in FIG. 2 to prepare it (step Y473).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is a loss stop pattern (step Y474). If the special figure 2 is off (step Y474; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step Y475) )I do. If the special figure 2 is not out of position (step Y474; N), a sorting process (step Y476) is performed.

  Then, the address of the second-half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of Toku-zu 2. (Step Y478). Next, a distribution process (step Y479) is performed, a second-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and saved in the second-half variation number area (step Y480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second variation number (step Y482). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of FIG. Prepare (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started from now is set.

[Change start information setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250 and Y270) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this change start information setting processing, first, the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y552), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is obtained (step Y553). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step Y555). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y557).

  In the special figure 2 change display game in the normal game state, a long change with a very long change time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60000 msec) excluding the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of counting the specified time (here, 60000 msec), is the added value Is calculated as

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558). If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y558; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set when the special figure 2 variation display game is in the normal gaming state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

  If the long change of the special figure 2 is not started (step Y559; N), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y560). If it is the start of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

  Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command setting process (step Y564) is performed. Do. Next, the hold number of the target is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the change start information is set. The process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set in the long variation of the special figure 2 in order to vary the time that is not sufficient with the 2-byte timer. In the variation start information setting process, the timer of 60000 msec and the number of repetitions of 9 are saved as an addition result, and the timer is decremented by the timer interrupt process. Set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is 10 minutes (= 60000 msec × 10). Since the period of the timer interrupt is 4 ms, it can be set up to about 262 seconds in 2 bytes, but it is expressed in a form of multiplication of 60 seconds for easy understanding.

[Time reduction fluctuation count update processing]
FIG. 64 shows the time shortening change frequency update process (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing. In the time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure is in the high probability state (during the high probability state) (step Y571), and if the special figure is in the high probability state (step Y571; Y), the time is determined. The process for updating the number of times of shortening fluctuation is ended. If the special figure high probability is not in progress (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure time reduction is in progress (step Y572). Then, if the special figure time is not working (step Y572; N), the time reduction variation number update processing is ended. If the special figure time is being reduced (step Y572; Y), the number of times of time shortening change is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the number of times of time shortening change is "0" (step Y574). .

If the number of times of the time reduction change is not “0” (step A754; N), the time reduction change number update processing is ended. If the number of times of the time shortening change becomes "0" (step Y574; Y), a signal relating to the end of the time saving (for example, two big hits are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575). , A signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 is opened longer. The state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578), and the ordinary figure game mode flag area is saved. Then, the flag for saving the normal time saving time is saved (step Y579), and the processing for updating the number of times of reduced time is ended.

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, commands are loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and effect command setting processing (step Y623) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the stop may be forcibly stopped before the change time set at the start of the change. Therefore, when the change is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. . Then, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec is set for a loss, and a display time of 2000 msec is set for a big hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of place, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y627; Y), the flow shifts to step Y642. If the special figure 1 is not out of the way (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 change display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the flow shifts to step Y639. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (step Y629). That is, in this case, the running of the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y639; Y), the flow shifts to step Y631. If the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y629; N), the number of times of design confirmation output is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the display time of the special figure 1 set as above is set as the display time of the special figure 2. A display time of display time + 4 ms is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 plus the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. The display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already being displayed, and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the time of the stop display is extended, but may be shortened in some cases.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 off symbol command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and effect command setting processing (step Y635) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), an effect command setting process (step Y638) is performed, and a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638) is performed.

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y640) The information is loaded from the special figure 1 special winning opening information area and saved in the special winning opening information area (step Y641). After that, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting processing 1 (step Y643) is performed. The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and effect command setting processing (step Y653) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 ms for a miss, 600 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (step Y657). If the special figure 2 is out of place (step Y657; Y), the flow shifts to step Y677. If the special figure 2 is not out of the way (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether the special figure 1 change display game is running or not can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 1 change display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the flow shifts to step Y673. If the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit is reached, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decorative special figure 1 is interrupted. The command is prepared (step Y671), the effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and the flow shifts to step Y673.

  In other words, in this case, the running of the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the small figure winning of the special figure 2 variable display game. It should be noted that a case where the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  If the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. If the special figure 1 is not being displayed (step Y660; N), the number of times of outputting the symbol confirmation number is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the display time of the special figure 2 set as above is set as the display time of the special figure 1. A display time of display time + 4 ms is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 plus the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be ended simultaneously. The display time is reset even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already being displayed, and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the time of the stop display is extended, but may be shortened in some cases.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 off symbol command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and effect command setting processing (step Y666) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing (step Y668) is performed, and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y669) is performed.

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and the special figure 2 small hit is determined, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit. A determination is made (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the flow shifts to step Y677. If it is not the special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y674). Y675), the information is loaded from the special figure 2 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special figure 2 display (step Y678) is performed. The displaying process ends.

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
FIG. 67 illustrates the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display processing, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y751), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753), and if the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. A test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON and the special symbol 1 signal ON) for the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area to prepare (step Y755), and effect command setting processing (step Y756) is performed. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the state of the probability.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y760), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special map 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is outlier information, it is determined whether or not it is a high probability final change (step Y765). In step Y765; N), it is determined whether or not it is a time reduction final change (step Y766). In this case, when the falling lottery for the running special figure 1 change display game is won, it is determined that the change is the high probability final change. Further, when the special figure 1 change display game being executed is the 100th (number of times of support) special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time shortening final change.

  If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765; N) and if it is not the time-reduction final fluctuation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. In the case of a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765; Y) or a time-reduction final fluctuation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and the production command A setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability status command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y769), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770). It is determined whether or not the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

  If the small hit in the special map 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the flow shifts to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is displayed. Thereafter, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), and the special figure 1 usual processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
68 and 69 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. The processing during special figure 2 display is the same as the above-described processing during special figure 1 display for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. Two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815). If the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. A test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON and the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) concerning the start of the big hit (Special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area to prepare (step Y817), and effect command setting processing (step Y818) is performed. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the state of the probability.

  After that, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y822), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y826) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special map 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is the outlier information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). . If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y827; Y), it is determined whether the change is a high probability final change (step Y828). If the small hit flag 2 is not a high probability final change (step Y828; N), the time is determined. It is determined whether it is the shortened final fluctuation (step Y829). In this case, if the falling lottery for the running special figure 2 change display game is won, it is determined that the change is the high probability final change. In addition, when the special figure 2 change display game being executed is the 100th (number of times of support) special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time shortening final change.

If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; N) and if it is not the time-reduction final fluctuation (step Y829; N), the process moves to step Y834. In the case of a high-probability final change (step Y828; Y) or a time-reduction final change (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and the production command A setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state, a large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the player is not made aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y834), and effect command setting processing (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal related to the right strike instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-hand operation is provided.
Thereafter, the lower winning award opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y840), and the out-of-fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning award opening unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step Y841). The transition setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and the processing for displaying the special figure 2 ends.

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether the change is a high probability final change (step Y843). If the small hit flag 2 is not a high probability final change (step Y843; N), the time is shortened. It is determined whether it is the final fluctuation (step Y844). In this case, if the falling lottery for the running special figure 2 change display game is won, it is determined that the change is the high probability final change. In addition, when the special figure 2 change display game being executed is the 100th (number of times of support) special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time shortening final change.

  If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N) or if it is not the time-reduction final fluctuation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. In the case of the high probability final fluctuation (step Y843; Y) or the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and the production command A setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y847), and a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is provided. Thereafter, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), and the special figure 2 usual processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851). The displaying process ends.

  That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the activation of the condition device. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant

[Fanfare / interval processing]
70 and 71 show the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112 and Y145) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In the fanfare / interval processing, it is first determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing ends. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether or not the round is the first round (step Y942).

  If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, if it is the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the general-purpose starting gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started when the gaming ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure change display game. I have.

  If the game ball has not passed through the normal figure starting gate 34 (step Y943; N), the processing during the fanfare / interval ends. On the other hand, when the game ball has passed to the general-purpose starting gate 34 (step Y943; Y), a round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit information is set. The value (10 in the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

  Next, the upper winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y947), and the out-of-fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y948). After that, the ON output data of the signal for operating the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y950). Then, a special winning opening opening information and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

  Next, the jackpot medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot medium processing control pointer area (step Y954). The special opening opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). When the opening and closing are repeated in one round, 0 is set as the initial value of the big hit processing control pointer. In the present embodiment, long opening with V is equivalent. When one opening is performed in one round, a big hit operation end value (2 in the present embodiment) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever member is operated by operating the lever solenoid 38f, and in the case of the present embodiment, only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N), stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

  Thereafter, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not the big hit of the special figure 1 has been reached (step Y960). If the big hit is the special figure 1 (step Y960; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is set in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. (Step Y962). On the other hand, if the special hit is not the special hit (step Y960; N), that is, if the special hit is the special hit 2, the process number is saved in the special process 2 game process number area (step Y963), and the special winning opening is opened. The time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

  Then, a signal relating to the opening start of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y965). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing member of the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The large winning opening count is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, for example, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (the first special gaming state), only the upper winning prize port (the first special fluctuation device 38) is opened, In the special game state based on the hit (the second special game state), only the lower large winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but not limited to this. For example, the opening and closing mode in the first special game state may be such that the upper winning opening is opened in the first round, and the lower winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 72 shows the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y115) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 big hit end processing, first, a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data is performed (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data indicates that there is no time reduction in step Y1101, the big hit end setting processing 1 (step Y1102) is performed. If the time reduction determination data indicates that there is a time reduction in step Y1101, the big hit end setting processing 2 ( Step Y1103) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, a specific area passage flag is set when a game ball flows into a specific area (probable change operation area), and when this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. . If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), the big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probably changing operation area) in the special game state based on the normal big hit (in the present embodiment, 10R normal big hit) is loaded. (Step Y1107).

  When it is not the specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; N), the process proceeds to step Y1109. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; Y), an effect command setting process (step Y1109) is performed by adding irregular probability change information to the probability information command (step Y1108). By the processing in step Y1109, the probability information command is transmitted to effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, a plurality of commands including information on the effect mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction”, “low probability / with time reduction”, and “low probability / without time reduction” are included. Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the irregular operation area, irregular irregularity information is added.

  Next, “0” related to the special figure 1 ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award winning illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1115), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (for example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

By performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing, the special figure change display game can be started for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the process, the special figure 2 game display processing is started by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started more than the special figure 1 variable display game. Can be started first. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, after the game control device 100 finishes the special game state, the second variable display game execution control unit executes the second variable display game execution control unit until the first variable display game execution control unit can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the two-variation display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 73 shows the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. The special figure 2 big hit end processing is the same processing except that the step Y1109 in the special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed. In the special figure 2 big hit end processing, first, a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data is performed (step Y1131). If the time reduction determination data indicates that there is no time reduction in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1132) is performed. If the time reduction determination data indicates that there is a time reduction in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 2 ( Step Y1133) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134). If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), the big hit end setting process 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, a probability information command is loaded from the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y1136), and a game ball to a specific area (probable operation area) in a special game state based on a normal big hit (in the present embodiment, 10R normal big hit) is loaded. (Step Y1137).

  If it is not the specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; N), the flow shifts to step Y1139. On the other hand, when it is the specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; Y), the irregularity probability change information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138), and the effect command setting processing (step Y1139) is performed. By the process in step Y1139, the probability information command is transmitted to effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, a plurality of commands including information on the effect mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction”, “low probability / with time reduction”, and “low probability / without time reduction” are included. Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the irregular operation area, irregular irregularity information is added.

  Next, “0” relating to the usual processing of the special figure 2 is set as the processing number (step Y1140), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award winning illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1145), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1146), the special figure 2 big hit end processing ends. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 74A shows the big hit end setting process 1 (steps Y1102 and 1132) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, no output is made only for the data setting.

Next, a signal relating to the start without time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, a normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a normal electric accessory 1) Set the open extension state signal to OFF.
Thereafter, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1153), and the no-figure time-saving flag is saved in the general-figure game mode flag area (step Y1154). Next, the special figure low probability and no time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

  Next, a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is provided. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1159), and the big hit end setting process 1 ends. By this processing, the normal game state is set.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 74 (b) shows the big hit end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, a signal relating to the start of the working hours is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, a normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a normal electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
Thereafter, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1163), and the flag with the time reduction is saved in the universal game mode flag area (step Y1164). Next, the special figure low probability and time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is initialized. The value is saved (step Y1166). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of times of support is 100, 100 is saved as an initial value in step Y1166.

  Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1167), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends. By this processing, a special game low probability second specific game state is set. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handing mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handing mode is set during the big hit, the setting related to the right-handing is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 75 shows the big hit end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the big hit end setting process 3, first, a signal relating to the start of special figure time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1171). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability & time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal are set to ON. Thereafter, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1173), and the special figure high probability and the time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-hand operation is provided. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y1177), and the big hit end setting process 3 ends. This process results in a high probability state. In other words, by executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 1, it becomes the first specific game state, and by executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 2, the special figure high probability is achieved. It becomes the 2nd specific game state.
By the above processing, the specific game state which is the high probability state after the end of the first special game state can be set. In other words, the game control device 100 increases the probability that the result of the special-variation display game will be a special result as compared with the normal state (first specific game state ST2, second special game state ST3 with a special figure high probability). Is generated as a specific game state generating means.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
FIG. 76 shows the small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y149) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command for opening the lower big winning opening is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 relating to the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).

  Next, the small hit release time (for example, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric accessory 2 active signal is turned ON) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step Y1206). Then, the lower winning port ON data is saved in the large winning port solenoid output data area (step Y1207), and the large winning port count number area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning port is cleared (step Y1208). The processing during the hit fanfare ends.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y152) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special figure 2 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 2 usual processing is set as the processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the number of the light off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether special figure low probability & time saving is not being performed (during normal game state) (step Y1337), and if special figure low probability & time saving is not being performed (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. I do. If the special figure low probability and no time saving are being performed (step Y1337; Y), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

  If the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y), a decoration special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and an effect command setting process (step Y1342) is performed. After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends. As a result, the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

  That is, the game control device 100 is controlled by one of the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the variable display game is performed, and when the other variable display game whose execution control is performed by the other variable display game execution control unit has a special result, one variable display game is executed. The resumption control means is capable of executing resumption control for resuming the resumption of one of the fluctuating display games which has been interrupted and resumed after the special game state based on the other fluctuating display game has ended.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 78 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 78, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interruption is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the cross key 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the cross key 29 is read in a timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, a process of changing the effect content is performed. .

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process for setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and the like and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing settings for controlling the progress of the effect and drawing commands. ) To set the preparation end of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and the processing is performed until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that the current time is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), an instruction to draw a screen is issued (step C16).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of the sound from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18) A board that performs a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the board effect device 44, and controls effects by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the accumulated value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (Step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (Step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 79 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (Step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (the RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thus, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, the command (data) can be moved to make a space. In addition, the analysis of the command can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (Step C210; N), the process returns to Step C207. When it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are analyzed collectively. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 80 shows a received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In the received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Also, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C234). In C234; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for commanding an operation related to a small hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, or the like). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C237; Y), the big hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot-related command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what the stop symbol of the special figure is). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol command (step C239; Y), the symbol command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of the symbol-type command (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of single-shot type commands such as the hold number command and the error command. (Step C241). The single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. The single command includes a customer waiting demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-reading symbol command (step C243). If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the pre-reading symbol-related command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol-related command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetching pattern command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching variable command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. A look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not a big hit occurs when a special-figure variation display game corresponding to a start-up memory (holding) in which the special-figure variation display game is not executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of fluctuation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability to the player, the display of the decoration special figure start display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a mode different from the normal mode. For example, an effect display is performed. The pre-reading commands (the pre-reading fluctuation command and the pre-reading symbol command) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the starting memory to be subjected to the pre-reading effect. It is transmitted to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

<Pre-reading production>
The effect control device 300 can execute a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display as the prefetch effect.
FIG. 81 shows an example of the pending change effect. First, display on the display device 41 in a predetermined game state (for example, the normal game state ST1) will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), at the center of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a decoration special figure variation display game display section 81 for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation. The decoration special figure variation display game display section 81 displays the decoration special figure variation display game by variably displaying the decoration identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping and displaying the information.

  In the lower part of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a standby-hold display section 82 for displaying a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the unstarted start memory. The decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the standby hold display section 82 is one-to-one corresponding to the start storage corresponding to the main fluctuation, and is displayed in the storage order, and in the example shown in FIG. This shows that there are three start memories corresponding to the main fluctuation. The decoration special figure start storage display at the left end is the decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time the decoration special figure start storage display is performed. In addition, in the standby holding display unit 82, it is possible to suggest a pre-read result such as a result of a special figure change display game or a change pattern corresponding to each start memory by a display mode.

  On the left side of the stand-by hold display unit 82, an on-hold hold display unit 83 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the currently running special figure change display game is provided. The decoration special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby hold display section 82 is shifted to the active hold display section 83 at the start of the main fluctuation. In addition, in the on-hold display section 83, it is possible to indicate the result of the main fluctuation to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, and the like by its display mode.

  The effect control device 300 executes an operation promoting effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 25 before executing the hold change effect. In the operation promoting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the display position of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81 moves to the upper right part of the display area of the display device 41, and the center of the display area of the display device 41 The effect button image 84a imitating the effect button 25, a notification image 84b (for example, a time bar image) for notifying the remaining length of the operation validity period, and a designation image 84c (for example, for specifying the operation mode of the effect button 25) An operation promotion image 84 including character images such as “press!” And “three hits!” Is displayed.

  The effect control device 300 executes the hold change effect when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode specified during the operation valid period, while the effect button 25 operates in the operation mode specified during the operation valid period. If not, the hold change effect is not executed. In the hold change effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), among the decorative special figure start memory displays displayed on the standby hold display section 82, the decorative feature corresponding to the start memory to be subjected to the hold change effect is displayed. The display mode (for example, color) of the diagram start storage display changes from the normal display mode (for example, white) to the specific display mode (for example, red or blue).

In this embodiment, the color of the decoration special figure start storage display is such that the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of a big hit (or the degree of expectation of a predetermined fluctuation pattern)) increases in the order of white <blue <red. . Hereinafter, the red decorative special figure start storage display will be referred to as “red hold”, and the blue decorative special figure start storage display will be referred to as “blue hold”.
In addition, the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display changed by the hold change effect is not limited to the color of the decoration special figure start storage display. That is, in the hold change effect, the color of the decoration special figure start storage display may change, the shape of the decoration special figure start storage display may change, or the size of the decoration special figure start storage display may change. Alternatively, at least two of the colors, shapes, and sizes of the decoration special figure start storage display may be changed.
If the effect button 25 is not operated in the operation mode designated during the operation valid period, the hold change effect may be executed after the operation valid period ends.
Further, the holding change effect may be executed without executing the operation promoting effect.

<Reach production>
The effect control device 300 includes, as reach effects, a normal reach effect, a weak SP reach effect having a high degree of expectation of a bigger hit than the normal reach effect (for example, a special 1-reach effect), and an expectation degree of a larger hit than a weak SP reach effect. A high strong SP reach effect (for example, special 3 reach effect) can be executed.
The effect control device 300 sets information for performing an effect according to the variable command from the game control device 100, for example, in the variable command processing (step C236) of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). Specifically, when the fluctuation command from the game control device 100 is a fluctuation command including information on a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect, information for performing the reach effect is set. As a result, the reach effect is executed in the special figure variation display game to be started.

Here, the variation patterns for executing the reach effect include at least a variation pattern ending with the normal reach effect, a variation pattern ending with the weak SP reach effect, and a variation pattern ending with the strong SP reach effect.
Further, the variation patterns ending with the weak SP reach effect include at least a pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is executed after the execution of the normal reach effect, and a pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is immediately executed without executing the normal reach effect. .
In addition, at least the pattern A, the pattern B, the pattern C, and the pattern D are the variation patterns that end in the strong SP reach effect.

The pattern A is a pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is executed after the execution of the normal reach effect, and the strong SP reach effect is executed after the execution of the weak SP reach effect.
FIG. 82 shows an example of the pattern A. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), when the special figure change display game is finished, the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the on-hold display section 83 disappears.
Next, when the next special figure change display game is started, the decoration special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby display section 82 is shifted to the active display section 83 as shown in FIG. Display is performed. Here, the result of the special figure change display game, the change pattern, and the like are suggested in the same manner as the pre-reading effect also in the on-hold display section 83. In addition, the decoration special figure variation display game display section 81 starts the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, and the variation display of the decoration identification information is performed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas. Be started.

If the special figure change display game is a special figure change display game that executes a strong SP reach effect of pattern A, the normal reach effect starts when the first half change ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c). Then, the same decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 81. In the state of temporary stop, the decoration identification information is displayed so as to fluctuate, indicating that it is not completely stopped.
Next, the weak SP reach effect is developed, and as shown in, for example, FIGS. The state is moved to the left corner and the right corner, and an effect such as a developed symbol is displayed in the center of the display area.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 82 (f) and (g), for example, as shown in FIGS. While moving to the left and right corners, an effect by a character or the like is displayed at the center of the display area.
Next, when the second half change is completed, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (h), the result of the special figure change display game is displayed on the decorative special figure change display game display section 81, and the special figure change display game ends. I do.

Pattern B is a pattern in which, after the execution of the normal reach effect, the strong SP reach effect is executed without executing the weak SP reach effect.
FIG. 83 shows an example of the pattern B. FIG. 83 is different from FIG. 82 only in that FIGS. 82 (d) and (e) are not provided, and the other points are the same as those in FIG. 82, and thus detailed description is omitted.

The pattern C is a pattern in which the normal SP and the weak SP reach are not executed and the strong SP reach is executed immediately.
FIG. 84 shows an example of the pattern C. FIG. 84 differs from FIG. 82 only in that FIGS. 82 (c), (d), and (e) are not provided, and the other points are the same as those in FIG. 82, and thus detailed description is omitted.

The pattern D is a pattern in which a strong SP reach effect is executed after performing a pseudo continuous effect in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed once more in the middle of the special figure variable display game, and then a re-variable effect is performed once or more. is there. In pattern D, the normal reach effect and the weak SP reach effect are not executed.
FIG. 85 shows an example of the pattern D. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the special figure change display game is finished, the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the on-hold display section 83 disappears.
Next, when the next special figure change display game is started, the decoration special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby display section 82 is shifted to the active display section 83 as shown in FIG. 85 (b), for example. Display is performed. Here, the result of the special figure change display game, the change pattern, and the like are suggested in the same manner as the pre-reading effect also in the on-hold display section 83. In addition, the decoration special figure variation display game display section 81 starts the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, and the variation display of the decoration identification information is performed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas. Be started.

If the special figure change display game is a special figure change display game that executes a strong SP reach effect of pattern D, a pseudo continuous effect starts when the first half change ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (c). As described above, after the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 81 in a result mode other than the hit result mode, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown, the re-variation display of the decoration identification information is started in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 81.
Next, as shown in FIGS. 85 (e) and (f), for example, as shown in FIGS. 85 (e) and (f), the left fluctuating display area and the right fluctuating display area of the decorative special figure fluctuating display game display section 81 are respectively the display areas. The state is moved to the left corner and the right corner, and an effect by a character or the like is displayed at the center of the display area.
Next, when the second half change is completed, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (g), the result of the special figure change display game is displayed on the decoration special figure change display game display section 81, and the special figure change display game ends. I do.

Note that the variation pattern that ends in the normal reach effect described above is, for example, a pattern shown in FIG. 82 (a) → (b) → (c) → (h).
Further, among the variation patterns that end in the weak SP reach effect described above, the pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is executed after the execution of the normal reach effect is shown in, for example, FIG. 82 (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). → (e) → (h).
Further, among the fluctuation patterns that end in the weak SP reach effect described above, the pattern in which the normal SP effect is executed without performing the normal reach effect is, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a) → (b) → (d) → (E) → (h).

FIG. 85 shows a pseudo continuous production in which the number of times of the re-performation effect (the effect in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and then re-displayed) is one. The number of effects may be plural.
In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the result and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game are also suggested in the in-execution suspension display unit 83 in the same manner as the prefetch effect. To be more specific, the decoration special figure start storage display of the specific display mode (red hold (decorative special figure start storage display with hatching in the figure) or blue hold (decoration special figure start with polka dot hatching in the figure) Storage display)) has been transferred from the standby hold display section 82 to the active hold display section 83. That is, FIGS. 82 to 85 exemplify a case where a reach effect is executed in the special figure change display game which is the target of the hold change effect, but of course, the special figure change display game which is not the target of the hold change effect. , It is also possible to execute a reach effect.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the normal-reach effect production mode executed when the pattern A is set (FIG. 82C) and the normal reach effect production performed when the pattern B is set Although the mode (FIG. 83 (c)) is the same, the pattern A and the pattern B may have different normal-reach effects.
In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, when the pattern A is set, the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect (FIGS. 82 (f) and (g)) and when the pattern B is set The effect mode of the strong SP reach effect to be executed (FIGS. 83 (d) and (e)) and the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect to be executed when the pattern C is set (FIGS. 84 (c) and (d)) And the production mode of the strong SP reach production performed when the pattern D is set (FIGS. 85 (e) and (f)), but the pattern A, the pattern B, the pattern C and the pattern D The production mode of the strong SP reach production may be made different.

Here, a variation pattern that ends with the strong SP reach effect will be described.
In the present embodiment, at least pattern A (normal → weak SP → strong SP), pattern B (normal → strong SP), pattern C (strong SP), and pattern D (pseudo Four variation patterns (run → strong SP) are prepared.
Then, in the special figure variation display game that is the target of the hold change effect of changing to the red hold, the pattern C is more easily selected than the pattern A, the pattern D is more easily selected than the pattern C, and the patterns A to D Among them, the pattern B is most easily selected.

Also, in the special figure change display game which is a target of the hold change effect of changing to the blue hold having a lower expectation than the red hold, the pattern A is more easily selected than the pattern C, and the pattern C is more easily selected than the pattern D. And the pattern B is most easily selected from the patterns A to D.
That is, the degree of expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of pattern B <pattern A <pattern C <pattern D.

When the start memory is generated, the game control device 100 transmits a look-ahead command related to the start memory to the effect control device 300. The look-ahead command includes information on a fluctuation pattern and information on a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target. This variation pattern is determined with reference to a variation pattern table.
Further, the game control device 100 transmits a variation command to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variation display. The fluctuation command includes information on a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the start memory of the fluctuation target. This variation pattern is also determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

  FIGS. 86A and 86B show a part of the variation pattern table. The table shown in FIG. 86 (a) is an example of a loss variation pattern table for the special figure 1 variation display game, in which the types of variation patterns and the selectivity in the normal game state ST1 are defined. The table shown in FIG. 86 (b) is an example of a big hit variation pattern table for the special figure 1 variation display game, in which the types of variation patterns and the selectivity in the normal game state ST1 are defined.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 determines that the current game state is the normal game state ST1 and the special figure change display game based on the starting memory of the prefetch target is the special figure 1 change display game. If the result of the one-variation display game is incorrect, the variation pattern is determined with reference to, for example, a variation pattern table shown in FIG. Send to
In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure change display game based on the start-up memory of the prefetch target is the special figure 1 change display game, and the special figure 1 change display game If the result is a big hit, for example, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 86 (b), and a prefetch command including information on the variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the change target is the special figure 1 change display game, and the special figure 1 change display game If the result is out of order, a variation pattern is determined with reference to, for example, a variation pattern table shown in FIG. 86A, and a variation command including information on the variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the change target is the special figure 1 change display game, and the special figure 1 change display game If the result is a big hit, for example, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 86 (b), and a variation command including information on the variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start-up memory of the prefetch target is out of order, the pattern D (pseudo continuous → The pattern C (strong SP) is less likely to be selected than the pattern A (normal → weak SP → strong SP), and the pattern B (normal → strong SP) is most likely to be selected. Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), for example, when the result of the special figure change display game based on the starting memory of the prefetch target is a big hit, the selectivity of the patterns A to D is the same. In other words, the degree of expectation of the big hit increases in the order of pattern B <pattern A <pattern C <pattern D.
In the example shown in FIG. 86 (b), a variation pattern without reach can be selected even in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit. You may comprise so that a fluctuation | variation pattern cannot be selected.

When the effect control device 300 receives the look-ahead command from the game control device 100, for example, in the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80), it is determined whether or not to execute the hold change effect. And a hold change effect lottery for determining the effect form of the hold change effect. This hold change effect lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the hold change effect distribution table.
FIG. 86 (c) shows a part of the pending change effect distribution table. The table shown in FIG. 86 (c) is an example of a special change 1 change display effect allocation table for the special figure 1 change display game which is referred to when a pre-reading command including information on a change pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect is received. The production mode and the selection rate of the pending change production in the normal gaming state ST1 are defined. When a pre-read command including information on the variation pattern that ends in the strong SP reach effect is received, a common pending change effect distribution table is used irrespective of the stop symbol information included in the pre-read command. .

That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is a pre-reading command including the current gaming state in the normal gaming state ST1, and the received pre-reading command including information on a variation pattern that ends in the strong SP reach effect, In the case where the special figure variable display game based on the start-up memory of the prefetching target is the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place or a big hit, for example, as shown in FIG. A pending change effect lottery is performed with reference to the pending change effect allocation table shown in FIG. 86 (c).
Then, when the “first effect mode” is selected in the hold change effect lottery, a hold change effect of changing the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the prefetch target to red hold is executed. In addition, when the “second effect mode” is selected in the hold change effect lottery, a hold change effect of changing the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the prefetch target to blue hold is executed. When “non-execution” is selected in the holding change effect lottery, the holding change effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the start memory of the prefetch target is not executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when a prefetch command including the information of the pattern A is received as the variation pattern that ends in the strong SP reach effect, the “first effect mode” is most difficult to be selected, and “ "None" is most likely to be selected.
In the present embodiment, when a pre-reading command including information on a fluctuation pattern that ends in a strong SP reach effect is received, a common hold change effect distribution is performed regardless of the result of the to-be-prefetched special figure fluctuation display game. Although the table (FIG. 86 (c)) is used, a different pending change effect distribution table may be used depending on whether the result of the special figure change display game to be prefetched is a big hit or not. good.

FIG. 86 (d) shows the relationship between the effect of the hold change effect and the effect of the strong SP reach effect, derived from FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b) and 86 (c).
For example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), about 30% of the pre-reading commands including the information on the variation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect transmitted from the game control device 100 include the information on the pattern A. , About 40% are prefetch commands containing information on pattern B, about 20% are prefetch commands containing information on pattern C, and about 10% contain information on pattern D. This is a look-ahead command.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), for example, when a prefetch command including the information of the pattern A is received, the “first effect mode” is selected at a rate of 4/30, and a rate of 6/30 is selected. , "Second effect mode" is selected, and "non-execution" is selected at a ratio of 20/30. That is, about 4% of the pre-reading commands including the information on the fluctuation pattern that ends in the strong SP reach effect transmitted from the game control device 100, about 4% are the pre-reading commands including the information on the pattern A, and the “first production mode” "Is a pre-reading command to be selected, about 6% is a pre-reading command including information of pattern A, and" 2nd production mode "is a pre-reading command to be selected, and about 20% is a pre-reading command to be selected. This is a look-ahead command that includes information and is a look-ahead command in which “non-execution” is selected.

Therefore, if there is no change in the game state or the like between the time of transmitting the pre-reading command and the time of transmitting the variable command, for example, as shown in FIG. In the special figure fluctuation display game, among the strong SP reach effects, the strong SP reach effect of pattern B is most easily executed, and the strong SP reach effect of pattern C is more easily executed than the strong SP reach effect of pattern A. The strong SP reach effect of pattern D is more easily executed than the strong SP reach effect of pattern C.
In the special figure change display game targeted for the hold change effect that changes to blue hold, among the strong SP reach effects, the strong SP reach effect of pattern B is most easily executed and the strong SP reach of pattern C The strong SP reach effect of pattern A is more easily executed than the effect of pattern A, and the strong SP reach effect of pattern C is more easily executed than the strong SP reach effect of pattern D.

  That is, before the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the variation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect is set, the look-up effect for the special figure variation display game is changed to a red hold having a higher degree of expectation than the blue hold. When the pending change effect is performed, the strong SP reach effect of the pattern C, which has a higher degree of expectation, out of the strong SP reach effect of the pattern A and the strong SP reach effect of the pattern C, as the strong SP reach effect. Of the strong SP reach effects of pattern C and the strong SP reach effects of pattern D, the strong SP reach effect of pattern D having a higher degree of expectation is more easily executed.

In addition, before executing the special figure change display game in which the change pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect is set, the look-up effect for the special figure change display game is changed to blue hold, which has a lower degree of expectation than red hold, as a prefetch effect. When the hold change effect is performed, the strong SP reach effect of pattern A, which has a lower degree of expectation, out of the strong SP reach effect of pattern A and the strong SP reach effect of pattern C, as the strong SP reach effect Of the strong SP reach effects of pattern C and the strong SP reach effects of pattern D, the strong SP reach effect of pattern C having a lower degree of expectation is more easily executed.
As described above, in the present embodiment, in accordance with the production mode of the strong SP reach production (process until the development to the strong SP reach production), the production of the notice production (pre-reading production) performed before the strong SP reach production is performed. Aspects can be sorted.

  As a look-ahead effect, when a hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed, the expectation that a strong SP reach effect is executed is higher than when a hold change effect that changes to blue hold is performed. . Therefore, when the hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed, if the strong SP reach effect of the pattern A that goes through the normal reach and the weak SP reach is performed, a feeling of being prolonged or bored occurs, and the interest of the reach effect is reduced. There is a risk of doing this. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed, the strong SP reach effect of the pattern A is the least likely to be executed in the strong SP reach effect, so Feeling and boredom are reduced, and the attraction of reach production can be enhanced.

  If the strong SP reach effect that is most easily executed is the strong SP reach effect of the pattern C in which the strong SP reach occurs suddenly, it is possible to effectively reduce the feeling of delay and boredom. However, since the strong SP reach production of pattern C has the shortest fluctuation time among the strong SP reach productions (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)), if the selection rate of the strong SP reach production of pattern C is increased, There is a risk that the number of prize balls paid out per unit time will be too large. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the pre-reading effect, even when the hold change effect changing to red hold or the hold change effect changing to blue hold is performed, Since the strong SP reach production of pattern B, which has a short time and the fluctuation time is longer than that of pattern C, is most easily executed in the strong SP reach production, the number of prize balls paid out per unit time becomes too large. There is no end.

  Further, the strong SP reach effect of the pattern D is different from the strong SP reach effect of the other patterns in that a pseudo continuous change occurs, and thus has a special feeling. In the present embodiment, the strong SP reach effect of the pattern D is a hold change effect that changes to red hold, which has a higher degree of expectation, among the hold change effect that changes to red hold and the hold change effect that changes to blue hold. It is easy to execute after the execution (see FIG. 86 (d)). Therefore, a special strong SP reach production (that is, a strong SP reach production of the pattern D) can be executed in a state where the expectation is further increased, so that the expectation of the player can be met and the expectation is further enhanced. It can enhance the appeal of reach production.

  Of course, before the execution of the special figure change display game in which the change pattern ending with the weak SP reach effect is set, a hold change effect that changes to blue hold or red hold as a look-ahead effect for the special figure change display game is performed. Before the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation pattern ending with the normal reach effect is set, a hold that changes to blue hold or red hold as a look-ahead effect for the special figure fluctuation display game may be performed. A change effect may be performed, and before execution of the special figure change display game in which a change pattern without reach is set, the special figure change display game is changed to blue hold or red hold as a prefetch effect directed to the special figure change display game. In some cases, a pending change effect is performed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed (a special figure variability display game) is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special special game state, a fluctuation pattern selecting means (game control device 100) for selecting a fluctuation pattern of a game, and a fluctuation for executing a fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selecting means. Effect means (effect control device 300), and the variable effect means includes a first reach effect (normal reach effect), a second reach effect (weak SP reach effect), and a third reach effect (strong SP reach effect). Can be executed, and the variation pattern selecting means determines the first variation pattern as a variation pattern for executing the third reach effect (a change pattern ending with the strong SP reach effect). A first pattern (pattern A) in which a second reach effect is executed after execution of the first reach effect, a third reach effect is executed after execution of the second reach effect, and a second reach effect is executed after the first reach effect is executed. And a third pattern (pattern C) for executing the third reach effect without executing the first reach effect and the second reach effect without executing the third reach effect (pattern B). , Can be selected, and among the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, the variation pattern having the highest expectation that the game result is a special result is the third pattern, and the game result is the special result. The fluctuation pattern having the lowest expected degree is the second pattern (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)).
That is, the fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation among the first pattern (pattern A), the second pattern (pattern B), and the third pattern (pattern C) is the third fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is possible to quickly indicate that the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to enhance the interest of the reach production.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a notice effect unit (effect control device 300) that executes a notice effect (prefetch effect) indicating a degree of expectation that the result of the game (special figure change display game) becomes a special result. ), And the production mode of the notice production includes a first production mode (for example, red reservation) and a second production mode (for example, blue reservation) having a lower degree of expectation than the first production mode. When the production mode of the notice production is the first production form, the third pattern (pattern C) is more likely to be selected than the first pattern (pattern A) as the variation pattern of the game to be subjected to the notice production. When the effect mode of the effect is the second effect mode, the first pattern (pattern A) is more likely to be selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the notice effect. It can be constructed (see FIG. 86 (d)).
With such a configuration, when a notice effect (for example, a change change effect that changes to red hold) in the first effect mode with a higher degree of expectation is performed, the first reach effect (normal reach effect) and the second reach effect are performed. The third pattern (pattern C) that does not undergo the first reach effect and the second reach effect becomes easier to select than the first pattern (pattern A) that undergoes the reach effect (weak SP reach effect). Therefore, the feeling of being prolonged and the feeling of being bored are reduced, and the interest of the reach effect can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the production mode of the notice effect (pre-reading effect) is the first effect mode (for example, red hold), the game (the special figure variation) to be the target of the notice effect is performed. When the second pattern (pattern B) is more easily selected as the variation pattern of the display game) than the third pattern (pattern C), and when the production mode of the notice production is the second production mode (for example, blue hold), The second pattern (pattern B) can be configured to be more easily selected than the first pattern (pattern A) as a variation pattern of a game to be announced in advance (see FIG. 86 (d)).
With this configuration, the second pattern (Pattern B) has a shorter fluctuation time than the first pattern (Pattern A) and a longer fluctuation time than the third pattern (Pattern C), regardless of the effect of the notice effect. ) Is most easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls paid out per unit time from becoming too large, while reducing the feeling of prolongation and boredom.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed (a special figure variability display game) is executed. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state, a fluctuation pattern selecting means (game control device 100) for selecting a fluctuation pattern of a game, and a fluctuation effect for executing a fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means. Means (effect control device 300), wherein the variable effect means includes: a reach effect in which a reach state in which a result can be a special result is displayed as an effect depending on the identification information to be stopped and displayed last; And a pseudo continuous effect capable of performing pseudo fluctuation display in which pseudo fluctuation display of the identification information of each time is performed. After performing a reach effect (normal reach effect or weak SP reach effect) that is different from the specific reach effect (strong SP reach effect) as a change pattern for executing the effect (a change pattern ending with the strong SP reach effect), A first pattern (pattern A or pattern B) for executing the reach effect, a second pattern (pattern D) for executing the specific reach effect after the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, and a reach effect different from the specific reach effect And a third pattern (pattern C) for executing the specific reach effect without executing the pseudo continuous effect, and among the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, the result of the game is The fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation of the special result is the second pattern, and the fluctuation pattern with the lowest expectation of the game result as the special result. Is the first pattern (see FIG. 86 (a), (b)).
That is, among the variation patterns that execute a specific reach effect (variation patterns that end with a strong SP reach effect), the variation pattern with the highest expectation is the second pattern (through a pseudo continuous effect that is not executed in other patterns). Pattern D). Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the degree of expectation is high with a special fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the reach effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a notice effect unit (effect control device 300) that executes a notice effect (prefetch effect) indicating a degree of expectation that the result of the game (special figure change display game) becomes a special result. ), And the production mode of the notice production includes a first production mode (for example, red reservation) and a second production mode (for example, blue reservation) having a lower degree of expectation than the first production mode, When the production mode of the preview production is the first production mode, the second pattern (pattern D) is more likely to be selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the game to be subjected to the preliminary production. When the effect mode of the effect is the second effect mode, the third pattern (pattern C) is more likely to be selected than the second pattern (pattern D) as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the notice effect. It can be constructed (see FIG. 86 (d)).
With such a configuration, when a notice effect in the first effect mode (for example, a hold change effect that changes to red hold) with a higher degree of expectation is performed, a pseudo continuous effect that is not executed in another pattern is performed. The second pattern (pattern D) is easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to meet the expectation of the player and further increase the expectation, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the reach effect.

  The notice effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the game (the special figure change display game) becomes a special result is not limited to the notice effect (pre-reading effect) performed before the execution of the game, and is performed during the execution of the game. It may be a notice effect to be performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the reach effect performed in the game is sorted according to the effect mode of the notice effect performed before the execution of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the effect form of the reach effect performed in the game may be sorted according to the effect state of the notice effect performed during the first half change (during the change until the start of the reach).

  Specifically, for example, during the first half change, as a notice effect, a step-up effect of the first effect mode (for example, a step-up effect ending in three stages) and a second effect with a lower degree of expectation than the first effect mode The step-up effect of the mode (for example, a step-up effect ending in one stage) can be executed, and for example, the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect (for the strong SP reach effect) so as to have a relationship as shown in FIG. Depending on the development process), an effect mode of a notice effect (step-up effect) performed before the strong SP reach effect may be allocated.

  Alternatively, for example, during the first half change, as a notice effect, a pseudo continuous production in the first production mode (pseudo continuous production in which the number of times of re-variation production is 3) and a second production having a lower degree of expectation than the first production mode. The pseudo continuous production (pseudo continuous production in which the number of times of re-fluctuation production is one) can be executed, and for example, the production mode (strong SP production) of the strong SP reach production so that the relationship shown in FIG. Depending on the production mode of the notice production (pseudo continuous production) performed before the strong SP reach production, the process may be distributed in accordance with the process until the reach production develops.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 23 lower plate (reservoir)
25 Direction buttons (operation unit)
100 game control device (variation pattern selection means)
153 Upper plate unit (operation means)
232 ball outlet (through hole)
233 Opening / closing door (opening / closing member)
252d LED board (board)
252e Front guiding recess (guiding means)
252f Left guiding recess (guiding means)
252g Right guiding recess (guiding means)
258b Groove (guidance means)
267a 1st front side water storage part (delay means)
268a 1st left water reservoir (delay means)
269a 1st right water reservoir (delay means)
300 production control device (fluctuation production means, notice production means)
D22, D23 Distance D3 Diameter (width of through hole)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine having a storage unit capable of storing gaming balls,
The storage section, on the bottom portion of the storage section,
A through hole for discharging the stored game balls,
An opening and closing member for opening and closing the through hole,
A gaming machine, wherein a distance between a lower surface of the bottom portion and a lower surface of the opening / closing member is longer than a distance between an upper surface of the bottom portion and an upper surface of the opening / closing member. The distance between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening and closing member is less than the diameter of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a distance between a lower surface of the bottom portion and a lower surface of the opening / closing member is equal to or greater than a diameter of a game ball.

Images